UBC Publications

UBC Publications

UBC Publications

The University of British Columbia Calendar 1930

Item Metadata

Download

Media
calendars-1.0169758.pdf
Metadata
JSON: calendars-1.0169758.json
JSON-LD: calendars-1.0169758-ld.json
RDF/XML (Pretty): calendars-1.0169758-rdf.xml
RDF/JSON: calendars-1.0169758-rdf.json
Turtle: calendars-1.0169758-turtle.txt
N-Triples: calendars-1.0169758-rdf-ntriples.txt
Original Record: calendars-1.0169758-source.json
Full Text
calendars-1.0169758-fulltext.txt
Citation
calendars-1.0169758.ris

Full Text

 W$t Mtttoersftp
OF
ptttfefj Columbia
CALENDAR
SIXTEENTH SESSION
1930- 1931
VANCOUVER,   BRITISH COLUMBIA
1930 GTfje ^ntoersttp
OF
Jfrtttsfy Columbia
K
CALENDAR
SIXTEENTH SESSION
1930 - 1931
VANCOUVER,   BRITISH   COLUMBIA
1930 ^^   At CONTENTS
Page
Academic Year   5
Visitor   -  7
Chancellor     7
President   7
The Board of Governors  7
The Senate  -  7
Officers and Staff  8
Historical Sketch  15
The Constitution of the University  17
The Work of the University  18
Retiring Allowances   19
Endowments  and  Donations  20
Suggested Local Scholarships  22
The Library   23
Location and Buildings _  25
General Information   38
Admission to the University  42
Registration and Attendance  45
Fees    _ -  48
Medals, Scholarships and Prizes  51
Faculty of Arts and Science
Time Table of Lectures    66
Time Table of Supplemental Examinations    70
Regulations in Reference to Courses—
Courses Leading to the Degree of B.A    71
Courses Leading to the Degree of B.Com    83
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A    85
Teacher Training  Course     92
Courses Leading to the Social Service Diploma    93
Examinations and Advancement    94
Courses of Instruction—       *
Department of Bacteriology    97
" Botany      99
" Chemistry  105
" Classics    Ill
" Economics, Sociology and Political Science  115
" Education     124
" English   129
" Geology and Geography  135
" History   141
" Mathematics  149
" Modern Languages   154
" Philosophy     159
" Physics     163
" Zoology     167
Faculty of Applied Science
Foreword   171
Regulations in Reference to Courses  172
General Outline of Courses   175
Courses in—
Chemical Engineering  179
Chemistry  „  180
Civil Engineering   181 The University of British Columbia
Page
Electrical Engineering   184
Forest Engineering   185
Geological Engineering  187
Mechanical Engineering  189
Metallurgical Engineering   191, 193
Mining Engineering   191, 194
Nursing and Health  195
Double Course for the Degree of B.A. and B.A.Sc  203
Course for the Combined Degrees of B.A. and B.ASc.
(in Nursing)   204
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.Sc  205
Examinations and Advancement  206
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Botany  208
" Chemistry   211
" Civil Engineering   215
" Economics     226
" Forestry   227
" Geology and Geography  232
" Mathematics   237
" Mechanical and Electrical Engineering  238
" Mining and Metallurgy  249
" Physics    -  253
" Nursing and Health  255
" Zoology  259
Faculty of Agriculture
Time Table of Lectures  262
Regulations in Reference to Courses—
For the B.S.A. Degree  265
The Occupational Course  265
Short Courses  ~  265
Extension Courses  266
Graduate Work   268
Examinations and Advancement  269
Courses in Instruction—
Department of Agronomy  272
" " Animal  Husbandry    274
" Dairying     276
" Horticulture   278
" Poultry Husbandry   282
" " Agricultural Economics   284
" Genetics   286
List of Students in Attendance, Session 1929-30  287
Degrees Conferred, 1929   305
Medals, Scholarships and Prizes Awarded, 1929  311
Summer Session   315
Canadian Officers' Training Corps  316
Student Organization  318
Inter-University Exchange of Undergraduates  322
Affiliated Colleges—
Victoria College  323
Union College of British Columbia  324
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia  324 Academic Year
AUGUST
25th Monday
SEPTEMBER
1st Monday
1st Monday
10th Wednesday
16th Tuesday
17th Wednesday
19th Friday
22nd Monday
23rd Tuesday
24th Wednesday
OCTOBER
6th Monday
8th Wednesday
10th Friday
llth Saturday
15th Wednesday
15th Wednesday
29th Wednesday
31st Friday
NOVEMBER
10th Monday
DECEMBER
5th Friday
8th Monday     1
to
18th Thursday   '
10th Wednesday
12th Friday
17th Wednesday
25th Thursday
30th Tuesday
ACADEMIC YEAR
1930
Matriculation Supplemental Examinations
begin.
ACADEMIC YEAR begins.
Labour Day.  University closed.
Supplemental Examinations in Arts begin.
Supplemental Examinations in Applied
Science begin.
Last day for Registration of First Year
Students in the Faculties of Arts and
Science, and Agriculture.
Last day for Registration of all other
students.
First Year Students in all Faculties report
at 2 p.m. in the Auditorium.
The opening addresses to the students of
all the Faculties at 3 p.m. in the Auditorium.
Lectures begin at 9 a.m.
Last day for payment of First Term fees.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Last day for change in Students' courses.
Last day for payment of fees for Autumn
Graduation.
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Meeting of the Faculty Council.
Armistice and Thanksgiving Day. University closed November 8th and 10th.
Last day of Lectures for Term.
^•Examinations.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Senate.
Christmas Day.   University closed December 25th-27th, inclusive.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture. The University of British Columbia
JANUARY
1st Thursday
5th Monday
19th Monday
1931
New Year's Day. University closed December 31st and January 1st.
Second Term begins.
Last day for payment of Second Term fees.
FEBRUARY
llth Wednesday Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
13th Friday        Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
18th "Wednesday Meeting of the Senate.
27th Friday Meeting of the Faculty Council.
APRIL
3rd Friday
6th Monday
9th Thursday
9th Thursday
Good Friday.     \ University closed April
Easter Monday. ) 3rd to 6th inclusive.
Last day of Lectures.
Last day for handing in graduation essays
and theses. -
10th Friday
to
25th Saturday
1
[-Sessional Examinations.
Field Work in Applied Science begins immediately at the close of the examinations.
23rd Thursday    Last day for payment of Graduation fees.
MAY
4th Monday Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
4th Monday Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
6th Wednesday Meeting of the Senate.
7th Thursday Congregation.
7th Thursday Meeting of Convocation.
24th Sunday Victoria Day. University closed May 25th.
JUNE
3rd Wednesday King's Birthday.   University closed.
15th to 30th        Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations.   (Time-tables to be arranged.)
JULY
1st Wednesday Dominion Day.   University closed.
2nd Thursday    Summer Session begins.
AUGUST
22nd Saturday
28th Friday
28th Friday
31st Monday
Summer Session ends.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Senate.
ACADEMIC YEAR ends. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH
COLUMBIA
VISITOR
The Hon. R. Randolph Bruce, Lieutenant-Governor of
British Columbia.
CHANCELLOR
R. E. McKechnie, Esa., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.CS.
PRESIDENT
L. S. Klinck, Esa., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D.
BOARD OF GOVERNORS
R. E. McKechnie, Esa., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S. (ex officio).
L. S. Klinck, Esa., M.S.A, D.Sc., LLJO. (ex officio).
Robie L. Reid, Esa., K.C, Vancouver.    Term expires 1931.
Christopher Spencer, Esa., Vancouver.   Term expires 1931.
Francis James Burd, Esa., Vancouver.   Term expires 1931.
B. C. Nicholas, Esa., Victoria.   Term expires 1933.
Joseph N. Ellis, Esa., B.C.L., K.C, Vancouver.    Term expires 1933.
W. H. Malkin, Esq., Vancouver.   Term expires 1933.
Denis Murphy, Hon. Mr. Justice, Vancouver.   Term expires 1935.
Henry C. Shaw, Esa., B.A., Vancouver.   Term expires 1935.
Mrs. Maude M. Welsh, New Westminster.   Term expires 1935.
SENATE
(?) The Minister of Education, The Honourable Joshua Hinchliffe, B.A.
The Chancellor, R. E. McKechnie, Esq., M.D, CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S.
The President (Chairman), L. S. Klinck, Esq, M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D.
$) Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement,Esq.,B.S.A,M.A.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock, Esq.,
M.A, LL.D, F.G.S, F.R.S.C.
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan, Esq,
M.A, Ph.D, F.R.S.C.
Representatives of the  Faculty of Agriculture:  H.  M.  Kino,  Esq.,
B.S.A., M.S.; A. F. Barss, Esq, A.B, B.S. in Agr, M.S., Ph.D.
Representatives   of   the   Faculty   of   Applied   Science:   William   E.
Duckering, Esq, A.B, B.S. in C.E., C.E.; R. H. Clark, Esa,
M.A, Ph.D.
Representatives of the Faculty of Arts and Science: Henry F. Angus,
Esa,  BA,  B.CL, M.A.;  M.  Y.  Williams,  Esq.,   B.Sc,  PhJD,
F.G.S.A, F.RS.C
IP Appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council.—
His Honour Peter S. Lampman, Victoria.
James Henderson, Esq, M.A, Vancouver.
James A. Campbell, Esq., BA, Vancouver.
H) The Superintendent of Education, S. J. Willis, Esa, B.A, LL.D.
The Principal of Vancouver Normal School, D. M. Robinson, Esq, B.A.
The Principal of Victoria Normal School, D. L. MacLaurin, Esa, BA.
ffl Representative  of   High  School   Principals   and  Assistants,   G.   W.
Clark, Esa, M.A. The University of British Columbia
(/) Representatives of Affiliated Colleges.-—
Victoria College, Victoria, P. H. Elliott, Esq., M.Sc.
Union   College   of   British   Columbia,   Vancouver   (Theological),
Rev. J. G. Brown, M.A, D.D.
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia, Vancouver, Rev. W. H. Vance, M.A, D.D.
(g) Elected by Convocation:—
His Honour F. W. Howay, LL.B, F.R.S.C, New Westminster.
G. G. Sedgewick, Esq, B.A, Ph.D, Vancouver.
Sherwood Lett, Esq, B.A, Vancouver.
H. T. Logan, Esq, M.A, Vancouver.
A. E. Lord, Esa., B.A, Vancouver.
His Honour J. D. Swanson, B.A, Kamloops.
Rev. Canon A. H. Sovereign, M.A, B.D, F.R.G.S., Vancouver.
Mrs. Evlyn F. Farris, M.A, LL.D, Vancouver.
Mrs. Beatrice Wood, B.A.Sc, Vancouver.
C. Killam, Esq, M.A, LL.D, D.C.L, Vancouver.
Miss A. B. Jamieson, B.A, Vancouver.
Sydney Anderson, Esq., B.A.Sc, Vancouver.
W. B. Burnett, Esq, B.A, M.D, C.M, Vancouver.
The Most Rev. A. U. de Pencier, M.A, D.D, Vancouver.
Lyle A. Atkinson, Esq., B.S.A, Vancouver.
OFFICERS AND STAFF
L.  S.  Klinck,  B.S.A.   (Toronto),  M.S.A,   D.Sc   (Iowa  State  College),
LL.D. (Western Ontario), President.
Daniel Buchanan, M.A.  (McMaster), Ph.D.  (Chicago), F.R.S.C, Dean
of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Reginald W.  Brock, M.A,  LL.D.   (Queen's), F.G.S,  F.R.S.C,  Dean of
the Faculty of Applied Science.
F.   M.   Clement,   B.S.A.   (Toronto),   M.A.   (Wisconsin),   Dean   of   the
Faculty of Agriculture.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Dean of Women.
George   M.  Weir,   B.A.   (McGill),   M.A.   (Sask.),   D.   Paed.   (Queen's),
Director of the Summer Session and Extra-sessional Classes.
Stanley W. Mathews, M.A.  (Queen's), Registrar.
Miss E. B. Abernethy, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Registrar.
F. Dallas, Bursar.
John Ridington, Librarian.
FACULTY COUNCIL
The President (Chairman), L. S. Klinck, Esa, M.S.A, D.Sc, LL.D.
Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esa, B.S.A, M.A.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock, Esq, M.A,
LL.D, F.G.S, F.R.S.C.
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan, Esq, M.A,
Ph.D, F.R.S.C.
Representative   of   the   Faculty   of   Agriculture,   P.   A.   Boving,   Esq,
Cand.Ph, Cand.Agr.
Representative of the Faculty of Applied Science, J. M. Turnbull, Esa,
B.A.Sc
Representative of the Faculty of Arts  and Science,  H. Ashton,  Esq,
M.A,  D.Lett,  D.Litt,  F.RIS.C,  Officier  de  l'lnstruction  Publique,
Chevalier de la Legion d'Honneur. Officers and Staff
Department of Agronomy
G. G. Moe, B.S.A, M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Cornell), Professor and Head
of the Department.
P. A. Boving, Cand.Ph. (Malmo, Sweden), Cand. Agr. (Alnarp, Agriculture, Sweden), Professor.
D. G. Laird, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Wisconsin), Assistant Professor.
Geo. B. Boving, B.S.A. (McGill), Assistant.
Cecil Lamb, B.S.A. (Brit Col.), M.S.A. (McGill), Assistant.
Department of Animal Husbandry
H. M. King, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College),
Professor and Head of the Department.
R. L. Davis, B.S. (Montana), M.S. (Iowa State College), Associate Professor.
H. R. Hare,  B.S.A.   (Toronto), M.A.   (Wisconsin),  Associate Professor.
J. G. Jervis, V.S. (Ont. Vet. Col.), B.V.Sc. (Toronto), Lecturer in
Veterinary Science.
C Duncan MacKenzie, B.S.A. (Brit. Col.), Research Assistant under
grant of the National  Research Council.
Department of Bacteriology
Hibbebt Winslow Hill, M.B, M.D,  D.P.H.   (Toronto), L.M.C.C,  Professor  and  Head  of the  Department.
Miss Helen M. Mathews, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
D. C. B. Duff, M.A.  (Toronto), Assistant.
Miss May H. Christison,  B.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  Assistant,
Department of Botany
Andrew H.  Hutchinson,  M.A.   (McMaster),  Ph.D.   (Chicago),   Professor and Head of the Department.
Frank  Dickson,   B.A.   (Queen's),  Associate   Professor.
John Davidson, F.L.S, F.B.S.E, Associate Professor.
Miss Jean Davidson, M.A.   (Brit.  Col.), Assistant.
Miss Josephine  Hart,  B.A.   (Brit. Col.),  Assistant.
L.  M.  Black,   B.S.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  Assistant.
A. E.  Hensley,   B.A.   (Queen's),  Assistant.
Miss  M.   R.  Ashton,   B.Sc   (London),  Assistant.
Department of Chemistry
Robert H. Clark, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Leipzig), F.R.S.C, Professor
and  Head of the  Department.
E. H.  Archibald,   B.Sc.   (Dal.),  A.M,   Ph.D.   (Harvard),   F.R.S.E.&C,
Professor of Analytical Chemistry.
W. F. Seyer, B.A, M.Sc (Alberta), Ph.D. (McGill), Associate Professor.
M. J. Marshall, M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology),
Associate  Professor.
J. Allen Harris, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Illinois), Assistant Professor.
William Ure, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (California Institute of Technology), Assistant  Professor.
John   Allardyce,   M.A.   (Brit.   Col.),   Instructor.
E. G. Hallonquist, B.A.  (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
F. L. Munro,  B.A.   (Brit. Col.),  Assistant.
R.  H.  Fleming,   B.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  Assistant. 10 The University of British Columbia
Miss Frances L.  Fowler,  B.A.   (Brit.  Col.), Assistant.
H. B. Marshall, B.A.   (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
D. W.  Oswald,  B.A.   (Brit.  Col.), Assistant.
Department of Civil Engineering
William E. Duckering, A.B, B.S. in C.E, C.E. (Washington), Professor
and Head of the Department.
E. G. Matheson, B.A.Sc (McGill), M.E.I.C, M.Am.S.CE, Associate
Professor.
F. A.  Wilkin,   B.A.Sc.   (McGill),  Assistant   Professor.
Allan H. Finlay, B.A.Sc (Brit. Col.). M.S. in C.E. (Illinois), Assistant
Professor.
A. Lighthall, B.Sc  (McGill), Assistant Professor.
A.  G.  Stuart,   B.Sc.   (McGill),   Instructor.
John   Craig  Oliver,  B.A,   B.A.Sc.   (Brit.   Col.),   Instructor.
Department of Classics
Lemuel Robertson, M.A.  (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department.
O. J. Todd, Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor of Greek.
H. T. Logan, M.C, B.A.  (McGill), M.A.  (Oxon.), Professor.
Eivion Owen,  B.A.   (Oxon.), Assistant  Professor.
Miss Jean  M.  Auld,  B.A.   (Colorado),   Instructor.
Miss Daisy  Christie,   B.A.   (Brit  Col.),   Assistant.
Miss Joyce  Jenkins,   B.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  Assistant.
Miss Nora  Holroyd,   B.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  Assistant.
Miss  Olive  D.  Mouat,  B.A.   (Brit.  Col.),   Assistant.
Department of Dairying
Wilfrid Sadler, B.S.A, M.Sc (McGill), N.D.D, British Dairy Institute,
University College, Reading, England, Professor and Head of the
Department.
N. S. Golding, N.D.A, N.D.D, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Iowa),
Associate  Professor.
Blythe Eagles, B.A.  (Brit. Col.), Ph.D.  (Toronto), Associate Professor.
Miss M. Thelma Colledge, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Miss   M.   Lenora   Irwin,   B.A.   (Brit   Col.),   M.Sc   (McGill),   Research
Assistant under grant of the Powell River Company.
Miss Violet E.  Dunbar,  M.A.   (Brit.   Col.),  Ph.D.   (Toronto),   Research
Assistant under grant of the Powell  River Company.
Miss Gladys I. Pendrait, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Research Assistant under grant
of the Empire  Marketing  Board.
Miss Vivienne G.  Hudson,  B.A.   (Brit. Col.),  Research Assistant under
grant of the National Research Council.
Department of Economics,  Sociology and Political Science
Theodore H. Boggs, B.A. (Acadia and Yale), M.A, Ph.D. (Yale), Professor and Head of the Department.
Henry  F.  Angus,  B.A.   (McGill),   B.C.L,   M.A.   (Oxon.),   Professor.
J. Friend Day, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Chicago), Associate Professor of
Economics  and Commerce. Officers and Staff 11
CoEAL Wesley Topping, A.B. (Queen's), B.D. (Wesleyan Theol. College), A.M. (Columbia), S.T.M. (Union Seminary), S.T.D. (Wesleyan Theol. College), Ph.D. (Columbia), Associate Professor of
Economics and Sociology.
G. F. Drummond, M.A. (St. Andrew's), M.Sc. (Econ.), (London), Assistant Professor.
Department of Education
George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D. Paed. (Queen's), Professor and Head of the Department.
Mrs. Jennie Wyman Pilcher, B.A, M.Sc (New Zealand), A.M, Ph.D.
(Stanford),  Associate  Professor  of  Psychology  and  Education.
William G. Black, B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Chicago), Associate Professor.
Department of English
G. G. Sedgewick, B.A. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor and Head of
the  Department.
W. L. MacDonald, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Ph.D. (Harvard),
Professor.
Frederick G. C Wood, B.A. (McGill), A.M. (Harvard), Associate Professor.
Thorleif Larsen,  M.A.   (Toronto),  B.A.   (Oxon.),  Associate  Professor.
Francis Cox Walker, B.A. (U.N.B.), A.M, Ph.D. (Harvard), Associate
Professor.
Frank H. Wilcox, A.B, Ph.D.  (California), Associate Professor.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Assistant Professor.
Hunter Campbell Lewis,  M.A.   (Brit. Col.), Assistant Professor.
Donald Eric Calvert,  B.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  M.A.   (Toronto),   Instructor.
Miss Dorothy  Blakey,  M.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  M.A.   (Toronto),  Assistant.
Mrs.  Stella Lewis,  M.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  Assistant.
Miss Isobel Harvey, M.A.  (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Department of Forestry
H. R. Christie, B.ScF. (Toronto), Professor and Head of the Department.
F. Malcolm Knapp, B.S.F. (Syracuse), M.S.F. (Wash.), Assistant Professor.
R. M. Brown, B.ScF. (Toronto), Honorary Lecturer in Forest Products.
Department of Geology and Geography
R W. Brock, M.A, LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S, F.RS.C, Professor and
Head of the Department
S. J. Schofield, M.A, B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Mass. Institute of Technology), F.G.S.A, F.R.S.C, Professor of Physical and Structural
Geology.
M. Y. Williams, B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Yale), F.G.S.A, F.R.S.C,
Professor of Palaeontology and  Stratigraphy.
T. C. Phemister, B.Sc (Glasgow), Sc.M. (Chicago), Ph.D, D.Sc (Glasgow),  Associate  Professor  of  Mineralogy  and  Petrology.
Martin A.  Peacock, Ph.D.   (Glasgow and  Harvard),  Lecturer.
Norman  Freshwater,  B.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  Assistant 12 The University of British Columbia
Department of History
D. C Harvey, B.A. (Dal.), M.A. (Oxon.), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head
of the Department.
W. N. Sage, B.A.  (Toronto), M.A. (Oxon.), Ph.D.  (Toronto), Professor.
F. H. Soward, B.A.  (Toronto), B.Litt.  (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
A. C. Cooke, B.A.  (Manitoba), M.A.  (Oxon.), Assistant Professor.
Miss Gwen Musgrave,  B.A.  (Brit. Col.),  Assistant.
Department of Horticulture
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Professor and Head
of the Department.
A. F. Barss, A.B. (Rochester), B.S. in Agr. (Cornell), M.S. (Oregon
Agricultural  College),  Ph.D.   (Chicago),   Professor.
F. E. Buck,  B.S.A.  (McGill), Associate Professor.
G. H. Harris,  B.S.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  M.S.   (Oregon State College),  Ph.D.
(California), Assistant  Professor.
Department of Mathematics
Daniel Buchanan, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
F. S. Nowlan, B.A. (Acadia), A.M. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor.
George  E.  Robinson,  B.A.   (Dal.),  Professor.
E. E. Jordan, M.A.  (Dal.), Associate Professor.
L. Richardson, B.Sc  (London), Associate Professor.
B. S. Hartley, M.A. (Cantab.), R.N.  (retired), Assistant Professor.
Frederick J. Brand,  B.A.   (Brit. Col.),  B.Sc.   (Oxon.),  Instructor,
Miss May L. Barclay, M.A.  (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Miss C.  Islay Johnston, M.A.   (Brit.  Col.), Assistant.
Albert R. Poole, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Ralph Hull,  B.A.   (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Miss M. Jean  Fisher,  B.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  Assistant.
Grant D. Morrison, B.A. (Washington), Assistant.
Department of Mechanical and  Electrical Engineering
Herbert Vickers, M.E. (Liverpool), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Birmingham), Professor and Head of the Department.
F. W. Vernon, B.Sc.Eng. (London), Wh.Sch, A.M.I. Mech. E, A.F.R.A.S,
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering.
H. F. G. Letson, M.C, B.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D, Engineering (London),
A.M.I. Mech.  E,  Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  and  Electrical
Engineering.
E. Geoffrey Cullwick, B.A. (Cantab.), Assistant Professor of Electrical
Engineering.
G. Sinclair Smith, M.A.Sc (McGill), Assistant Professor of Mechanical
Engineering.
W. B. Coulthard, B.Sc. (London), Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering.
John F. Bell, Eng. Capt. O.B.E, R.N, M.E.I.C, Instructor in Mechanical Engineering.
H. P. Archibald, B.A.Sc  (McGill), Instructor. Officers and Staff 13
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
J. M. Turnbull, B.A.Sc  (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department.
H. N. Thomson,  B.Sc   (McGill),  Professor of Metallurgy.
George A. Gillies, M.Sc   (McGill), Associate  Professor of Mining.
W. B. Bishop, Assistant in Metallurgy.
Department of Modern Languages
H. Ashton, M.A. (Cantab.), D. Lett. (Univ. Paris), D. Litt. (Birmingham), F.R.S.C, Officier de l'lnstruction Publique (France), Chevalier
de la Legion d'Honneur, Professor and Head of the Department
David Owen Evans, M.A, Ph.D. (Oxon.), D. Lett (Univ. of Paris),
Professor of French.
A. F. B. Clark, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D.  (Harvard), Professor of French.
Miss Isabel MacInnes, M.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (California), Associate
Professor of Modern Languages.
Mess Janet T. Greig, B.A. (Queen's), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Professor of French.
Miss Joyce Hallamore, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor in German.
E. E. Delavault, L. en D. (Paris), Assistant in French.
Madame G. Barry, Assistant in French.   .
Miss Wessie Tipping, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant in French.
Madame Darlington, Assistant in French.
Miss Dorothy Dallas, M.A.   (Brit. Col.), Assistant in French,
Mrs. Alice Roys, M.A. (California), Assistant in German.
Department of Nursing and Health
Hibbert Winslow Hill, M.B, M.D, D.P.H. Toronto), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
Miss Mabel F. Gray, R.N, CertP.H.N. (Simmons College), Assistant
Professor of Nursing.
Miss Margaret E. Kerr, B.A.Sc. Nursing (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Columbia),
Instructor.  |
Department of Philosophy
H.  T.  J.  Coleman,  B.A.   (Toronto),  Ph.D.   (Columbia),  Professor  and
Head of the Department.
James  Henderson,   M.A.   (Glasgow),   Professor.
Mrs. Jennie Wyman Pilcher, B.A, M.Sc  (New Zealand), A.M, Ph.D.
(Stanford),  Associate  Professor of  Psychology and  Education.
Department of Physics
T. C Hebb, M.A, B.Sc. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head of
the Department.
A.  E.  Hennings,  M.A.   (Lake  Forest  College,  111.),   Ph.D.   (Chicago),
Professor.
J. G. Davidson, B.A.  (Toronto),  Ph.D.  (Calif.), Associate Professor.
Gordon Merritt Shrum, M.A, Ph.D.  (Toronto), Associate Professor.
H. Grayson-Smith, M.A, Ph.D.  (Toronto), Assistant Professor,
R. D. James,  B.A.   (Brit. Col.), Assistant
Kenneth R. More, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Elmer O. Anderson, B.A.  (Brit. Col.), Assistant. 14 The University of British Columbia
Department of Poultry Husbandry
E. A. Lloyd, B.S.A. (Sask.), M.S.A. (Washington State College), Professor and Head of the Department.
V. S. Asmundson, B.S.A. (Sask.), M.S.A. (Cornell), Associate Professor.
W. J. Riley, B.S.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant.
Jacob Biely, B.S.A. (Brit Col.), M.Sc. (Kansas State Agric. College),
Assistant.
Department of Zoology
C. McLean Fraser, M.A.  (Toronto), Ph.D.  (Iowa),  F.R.S.C, Professor
and  Head of the Department.
G. J.  Spencer, B.S.A.   (Toronto),  M.S.   (Illinois),  Assistant Professor.
Miss Mildred H. Campbell, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
Miss Verna Z. Lucas, B.A.  (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Harold White, M.D, C.M.  (McGill), Medical Examiner to Students.
Mrs. C A. Lucas, R. N, Public Health Nurse.
On Leave of Absence, Session 1929-1930
D. G. Laird, Assistant Professor of Agronomy.
Frank Dickson, Associate Professor of Botany.
John  Allardyce,   Instructor  in  Chemistry.
O. J. Todd,  Professor of Greek.
George M. Weir, Professor of Education.
Thorleif Larsen,  Associate  Professor  of English.
S. J. Schofield, Professor of Physical and Structural Geology.
Mdw Janet T. Greig, Assistant Professor of French.
V.  S. Asmundson,  Associate  Professor  of  Poultry  Husbandry. THE  UNIVERSITY OF  BRITISH
COLUMBIA
HISTORICAL SKETCH
The creation of a University in British Columbia was first
advocated by Superintendent Jessop in 1877, but it was not
until 1890 that the Provincial Legislature passed an Act
establishing a body politic and corporate named '' The University
of British Columbia.'' In 1891 this Act was amended to require
that a meeting of the Senate be held within one month after
the election of the Senators by Convocation. The Senators were
elected, but a quorum did not assemble on the date fixed by
the Chancellor, Dr. I. W. Powell, of Victoria. Thus the first
attempt to establish a University in British Columbia failed.
However, some of the work normally done in a University
was begun in 1894, when an Act was passed which permitted
the affiliation of high schools in the Province with recognized
Canadian Universities. In 1899 Vancouver High School was
affiliated with McGill University in order to provide First Year
work in Arts, and took the name of Vancouver College. First
Year work in Arts was offered by Victoria High School when
it became Victoria College by affiliation with McGill University
in 1902. In the same year Vancouver College undertook the
Second Year in Arts.
In 1906 an Act was passed incorporating the Royal
Institution for the Advancement of Learning of British Columbia, which, in the same year, established at Vancouver the
McGill University College of British Columbia. The scope of
the work undertaken by this college was gradually increased
until at the time it was taken over by the University of British
Columbia it was giving three years in Arts and Science, and
two years in Applied Science. When the University of British
Columbia opened in the autumn of 1915, both the McGill University College of Vancouver and Victoria College, which since
1907 had been a part of it, ceased to exist. 16 The University of British Columbia
Definite steps to establish the University were taken by
Dr. H. E. Young, Minister of Education, in 1907, when he
introduced a "University Endowment Act." This Act was
followed in 1908 by an Act establishing and incorporating the
University of British Columbia and repealing the old Act of
1890-1. This Aet, with its subsequent amendments, determines
the present constitution of the University.
As authorized by an Act passed by the Provincial Legislature
in 1910, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed a Site
Commission to decide upon a site for the proposed University.
The Commission held its first meeting on May 25th, 1910, in
Victoria, and after a thorough examination of the Province
recommended the vicinity of Vancouver. In the autumn the
Executive Council decided to place the University at Point
Grey—the site which the Commission had named as its first
choice. In 1911 the Legislature passed an Act authorizing the
Lieutenant-Governor in Council to grant this site to the University. The grant was increased in 1915, so that it now consists
of 548 acres at the extremity of Point Grey. The waters of
the Gulf of Georgia form more than half the boundary of the
University Campus. A tract of some 3,000 acres of Government land immediately adjoining the site, and lying between
it and the City of Vancouver, has been set aside by the Government in order that University revenue may be provided by its
sale or lease,    k
In February, 1912, the Hon. H. E. Young, Minister of
Education, called for competitive plans which should include
plans in detail for four buildings to be erected immediately, and
a block plan showing all the proposed buildings on the Campus.
Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, of Vancouver, B. C, were the
successful competitors, and were appointed University architects.
The first Convocation, held on August 1st, 1912, chose Mr.
F. L. Carter-Cotton as first chancellor of the University. In
March, 1913, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed as
President of the University F. F. Wesbrook, M.A., M.D, C.M,
LL.D. On April 4th, 1918, Dr. R. E. McKechnie was elected
Chancellor.    Dr.  McKechnie has been re-elected continuously Historical Sketch 17
since that date and entered on his fifth term in May, 1930. On
the death of President Wesbrook, October 20th, 1918, L. S.
Klinck, Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, was appointed
acting President, and on June 1st, 1919, President.
From its opening in 1915 till the Summer of 1925, the
University carried on its work in temporary quarters on part
of the site of the General Hospital in Fairview.
Construction work was commenced on the Science Building
at the permanent site in Point Grey in 1914, but was interrupted because of war conditions. Work on this building was
resumed in 1923, and in the Autumn of the same year the
contract was let for the Library. These two buildings, which
are of stone and are fireproof, conform closely to the original
plans as prepared by the architects in 1914. The initial units
of these structures, as well as nine other buildings which are
of a less permanent character and are described at a later page
in this Calendar, were completed in 1925, and at the beginning
of Session 1925-26 the University commenced work in its new
quarters.
The Inauguration of the new buildings was held on October
15th and 16th, 1925, on which occasion honorary degrees were
granted by the University for the first time.
THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNIVERSITY
The Constitution of the University is governed by the British
Columbia University Act B.C.R.S. 1924 c. 265, which provides
That the University shall consist of a Chancellor, Convocation, Board of Governors, Senate, and the Faculties;
that the first Convocation shall consist of all graduates
of any university in His Majesty's dominions resident in
the Province two years prior to the date fixed for the
first meeting of Convocation, together with twenty-five
members selected by the Lieutenant-Governor in
Council. After the first Convocation it shall consist of
the Chancellor,  Senate, members of the first  Convoca- 18 The University of British Columbia
tion, and all graduates of the University; that the
Chancellor shall be elected by Convocation; that the
Board of Governors shall consist of the Chancellor,
President, and nine persons appointed by the Lieutenant-
Governor in Council; that the Senate shall consist of:
(a) The Minister of Education, the Chancellor, and the
President of the University, who shall be Chairman
thereof; (b) the deans and two professors of each of the
Faculties elected by members of the Faculty; (c) three
members to be appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in
Council; (d) the Superintendent of Education, the principals of the normal schools; (e) one member elected by
the high-school principals and assistants who are actually
engaged in teaching; (/) one member elected by the
Provincial Teachers' Institute, organized under subsection (e) of section 8 of the "Public Schools Act";
(g) one member to be elected by the governing body of
every affiliated college or school in this Province; (h)
fifteen members to be elected by Convocation from the
members thereof;
It is further provided that the University shall be non-
sectarian.
The University Act gives the University full powers to grant
such degrees in the several Faculties and different branches of
knowledge as the Senate may from time to time determine.
It reserves for the University the sole right in this Province to
confer degrees, except in Theology, and it expressly enacts
that "No other university having corporate powers capable of
being exercised within the Province shall be known by the
same name, nor shall any such university have power to grant
degrees.''
THE WORK OF THE UNIVERSITY
The University of British Columbia is an integral part of
the publie educational system of the Province, and its function
is to complete the work begun in the public and high schools.
It is the policy of the University to promote education in general, Retiring Allowances 19
and  in  particular  to  serve   its  constituency   through   three
channels—teaching, research, and extension work.
As regards teaching, the University furnishes instruction in
the various branches of a liberal education and in those technical
departments which are most directly related to the life and
industries of the Province. The scope of the teaching activity
of the University is fully described in Sec. 9 of the Act.
In order to make the teaching of the University more vital
and for the advancement of knowledge, research is encouraged
in every department.
The people of the Province are informed of the results of
special work by the staff of the University through a system of
extension lectures. The University sends lecturers to various
parts of the Province during the examination weeks in December
and April. In the case of places which can be visited without
prejudice to the duties of the lecturer at the University, lectures
are arranged to take place during the University term. A list
of subjects and lecturers can be obtained on application to the
Secretary of the Extension Lecture Committee, through whom
all arrangements are made.
RETIRING ALLOWANCES
In March, 1924, the Board of Governors of the University
of British Columbia adopted the contributory plan of retiring
allowances for members of the teaching staff. Contracts are
placed with the Teachers' Insurance and Annuity Association
of America, a corporation made possible by the Carnegie Corporation "to provide insurance and annuities for teachers and
other persons employed by colleges, by universities, or by institutions engaged primarily in educational or research work.''
In May, 1924, the University of British Columbia was elected
as a member of the list of institutions associated with the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching and received a grant of $50,000.00, payable in ten annual installments,
for the purpose of providing supplementary annuities for the
older professors of the institution. 20 The University of British Columbia
ENDOWMENTS AND DONATIONS
However well supported by public funds, a University must
depend to a great extent upon private benefactors. In anticipation of endowments the Act provides that:
"Any person or corporation may, with the approval of the Senate,
found one or more professorships, lectureships, fellowships,
scholarships, exhibitions, prizes, or other awards in the University, by providing a sufficient endowment in land or other
property, and conveying the same to the University for such
purposes, and every such endowment of lands or other property
shall be vested in the University for the purpose or purposes
for which it is given."
Only a limited number are in a position to make endowments, but many—including alumni and friends of higher education—may add greatly to the usefulness of the University by
making contributions that lie within their power. It is gratifying to note that the number of those) who assist in this way has
been constantly growing.
It has become a tradition for each Graduating Class to make
a gift to the University. In the spring of 1928 this gift took
the form of a granite seat as a memorial to the late Dr. F. F.
Wesbrook.
The removal of the University to its permanent home in
Point Grey has greatly stimulated interest in its welfare and
progress, and within the last few years many valuable donations
have been received, especially in the form of equipment for the
various Laboratories.
In the Summer of 1929, Captain J. C. Dun-Waters, of
Fintry, B. C, and his Associates in Scotland, donated to the
University twenty-four head of selected Ayrshire cattle, representing the best blood lines of the leading herds of Scotland.
The cattle are to be used as foundation stock at the University
for the improvement of old herds in the Province, and for the
establishment of new ones.
In May, 1928, Mr. A. J. Hook and Mrs. E. Jackson, Cobble
Hill, presented to the University an extensive and arranged
collection of insects of all orders, with smaller, though representative, collections of Crustacea, mounted birds' skins and
birds' eggs, and mounted skins and skulls of mammals.    The Endowments and Donations
21
insects are representative of Great Britain, Canada and, to some
extent of Japan; the birds and mammals are representative of
Britain and Canada. The collections are contained in uniform
mahogany cases and are accompanied by accession catalogues
with numbers runnning to nearly four thousand named species.
They were made by Mr. Hook, his three sons and daughter, Mrs.
E. Jackson, and were given to the University as a memorial to
the three boys who were killed in the war. This gift was
acknowledged in the calendar for 1929-30, but the donors' names
were not correctly stated.
A list of the other most important gifts received during
last year is given below under the various departments.
Department of Botany
(For Herbarium and Botanical Gardens)
SEEDS
Miss Dorothy Newton, Victoria.
Prof. H. R. Christie, Vancouver.
Mr. E. Walmsley, New Westminster.
Marsh Botanical Garden, Yale University.
Botanical Garden, Harvard University.
Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn.
Boyce Thompson Arboretum, Yonkers.
United States Department of Agriculture, Washington.
Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England.
Royal Horticultural Society, Ripley, England.
Royal Botanic Garden, Edinburgh, Scotland.
Botanic Gardens, Glasgow, Scotland.
Botanic Gardens, Glasnevin, Ireland.
Botanical Garden, Lund,
Jardin Botanique de Copenhague.
Jardin Botanique de l'Universite d'Amsterdam.
Jardin Botanique de l'Universite de Liege.
Ecoles Forestieres des Barres.
Jardin Botanique, Ville de Nantes.
Ville de Lyons Jardin and Collections Botaniques.
Salgues Foundation, Brignoles Botanic Station.
Museum d'Histoire naturelle, Paris.
Botanical Garden, University of Valencia.
Jardim Botanico da Universidade de Coimbra.
Botanischen Gartens, Basel.
Mestaka Botanica Skolni Zahrada.
Botanischer Garten  der Stadt Kassel,  (Cassel).
Botanischen Gartens, Bremen.
Botanic Garden of the Faculty of Agriculture, The University of
Sofia.
University Botanic Garden, Cernauti.
Ogrod Botaniczny, Universytetu Jagiellonskiego.
Botanical Garden of Poznan, Poznan.
Russia. Institute of Applied Botany, Leningrad.
Botanical Gardens, University of Moscow.
Asia. Botanical Garden, University of Central Asia, Taschkent.
Japan. Botanic Garden of the Faculty of Agriculture, Hakkaido Imperial
University, Sapporo.
Botanic Gardens, University of Tokyo, Japan.
Canaoa.
United States.
Great Britain.
Sweden.
Denmark.
Holland.
Belgium.
France.
Spain.
Portugal.
Switzerland.
Czecho-Slovakia.
Germany.
Bulgaria.
Roumania.
Poland. 22 The University of British Columbia
HERBARIUM AND GARDEN SPECIMENS
Mr. G. S. Boulton. Vancouver, B. C—Collection of flora, Chilcotin district.
Mr. Robert Greggor, Victoria, B. C.—Collection of seaweeds.
Mrs. Mary Higgins, Victoria, B. C.—Bulbs.
Mr. A. Hornby, Summerland, B. C—Bulbs and garden plants.
Mr. W. Sandell, Vancouver, B. C.—Roots of iris and other aquatic plants.
Mr. D. H. Snowberger, Idaho—Rooted specimens for garden.
United States Department of Agriculture. Chico. California—Shrub.
Mr. G. Woolliams, Summerland, B. C.—Bulbs and roots of dry belt plants.
Department of Forestry
Dominion Forest Service:
Ottawa—Forestry publications.
Kamloops—Tree seeds and seedlings.
New Westminster—Tree seeds.
Ontario Forest Service, Toronto—Forestry publications.
U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C.—Forestry publications.
Commonwealth Forestry Bureau, Canberra, Australia—Forestry publications.
Chief Geographer, Department of Lands, Victoria, B. C.—Maps.
Caterpillar Tractor Co., San Leandro, California—Pictures of logging operations.
E. H. Edwards Co., San Francisco—Skyline deflection chart.
R. C. Richardson, Campbell River Timber Co.—Topographic maps.
Prof.  M.  Fujika,  Tokio, Japan—Collection of hand specimens of woods of Japan.
W.  H.  Powell,  Vancouver Water Board—Samples of silicifled  yellow cedar wood
from Burwell Lake.
James Kay, Duncan, B. C.—Microscope slides of British Columbia woods.
Oiie Larson, Roe Lake, B. C.—Sample boards.
Department of Geology and Geography
Dr. F. G. Barnwell—Map of East Indies.
F. Ebbutt—Mineral specimens.
Geo. H. Kilburn—Specimens of uralite and epidote, Jumbo Mine, Prince of Wales
Island.
Dr. H. T. James—Unusual sample of sulphide ore, Hidden Creek Mine.
Gifts of old postage stamps for the University collection of "The Postage
Stamps of Canada," have been received from:
M. Neal Carter, Vancouver.
A, W. McLeod, New Westminster.
Irvine   Keenleyside,   Vancouver.
Herbert  H.  Griffin,  Vancouver.
Miss M. G. Morrison,  Vancouver.
SUGGESTED LOCAL SCHOLARSHIPS
As the number of Matriculation Scholarships offered at
present is quite inadequate to the needs of the Province, a
scheme which has great possibilities both for the growth of the
University and the prosperity of the Province is earnestly
recommended to consideration.
In the large universities, both of Great Britain and the
United States, local or district scholarships have proved a strong
bond between the community and the University, have brought
the University close to the life of the young, and opened up
the prospect of a University education to many who would not
otherwise have contemplated it. The Library 23
Such local or district scholarships might be established as
Matriculation Scholarships, by City or Municipal Councils or
other public bodies, or by private benefactors. They would be
awarded by a local authority, but the University would reserve
the right of confirmation.
In awarding such scholarships, standing in the Matriculation Examination need not be the only consideration. It is
desirable that regard should be had also to financial circumstances, character, and intellectual promise. Scholarships may
be offered for students taking a particular course, and in this
way the study of such sciences and technical branches of knowledge as have special importance for the industries of the
district may be encouraged. In short, local scholarships may be
arranged to meet local needs and to prepare the native sons
of the Province to play their part in the development of its
resources.
THE LIBRARY
The University Library consists of 76,000 volumes and
about 10,000 pamphlets. It includes representative works in
all the courses offered by the University, and a growing collection of works on other subjects.
The Library receives regularly about 550 magazines and
periodical publications.
The book collection is classified throughout on the Congressional system.
Books can be borrowed by students for a period of seven
days, or for a shorter time should the work be in general demand. Books to which the teaching staff have specially referred their students are placed in a "Reserved" class. These
are shelved apart from the main collection, and are loaned
only for use in the building, and for a limited period of two
hours. They may, however, be taken from the Library for
over-night loan, or for any period in which the Library is closed.
In these cases they are returnable before 9 a.m., or, in the case
of students of classes meeting at 8:45 a.m., before 10 a.m. 24 The University of British Columbia
Unbound periodicals are not loaned. Bound periodicals,
and books that are costly, rare, or unsuitable for general circulation, are loaned only under special conditions.
While the Library is primarily for the staff and students
of the University, its resources are available to those of the
general public engaged in research or special study, and who
make personal application to the Librarian for the privilege of
its use. Such persons are known as "Extra-mural Readers."
By order of the Board of Governors, a fee of $1.00 per calendar
year is charged such readers. In addition, they pay necessary
mailing costs, a deposit being required from those unable to call
personally for books loaned.
During the session the Library is open on week days from
8:45 a.m. to 9:45 p.m., except on Saturdays, when the hour
of closing is 5 p.m. In vacation it is open from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m.,
except on Saturdays, when the hours are from 9 a.m. to noon.
The University is deeply indebted to all who have made
gifts to the Library during the past year. These have been
both valuable and numerous. Their number prevents detailed
acknowledgment, but recognition should be made of a number
of sets of transactions, and complete or partial sets of scientific
periodicals, given by societies and friends of the University. •  LOCATION AND BUILDINGS
LOCATION
The University is situated on the promontory which forms
the western extremity of the Point Grey Peninsula. On three
sides it is bounded by the Gulf of Georgia. The site comprises
an area of 548 acres, of which approximately one-half is campus.
In all directions appear snow-capped mountains, strikingly
rugged and impressive.
BUILDINGS
The buildings, planned to meet the requirements of fifteen
hundred students, are of two classes, permanent and semipermanent. The former were designed by the University architects, Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, the latter by architects of
the Department of Public Works of the Provincial Government.
The permanent buildings have been erected in the location
originally assigned for them; the others in the quadrangle designated as "unassigned" in the original plan. By utilizing the
"unassigned" area for the semi-permanent buildings, all the
locations intended for future expansion have been left available.
The entire mechanical equipment of these buildings was
designed after a close study had been made not only of present
requirements, but of the ultimate development of the institution.
This consideration accounts for the fact that only a part of the
present equipment is permanent. After a careful survey of the
whole system, a forced hot water system was found to present
advantages that made its adoption advisable. Direct radiation
with a system of warmed air supply and extraction for ventilation is used to take care of the heat losses in the buildings. A
separate system of ventilation is installed for all sanitary conveniences, and a specially constructed system for fume closets.
The various services throughout these buildings, such as hot and
cold water, distilled water, gas and steam for laboratory
purposes, compressed air, etc, with the necessary apparatus, are
all of a modern type.    An attempt has been made to reduce 26 The University of British Columbia
vibration and noise to a minimum by installing all moving
apparatus on floating slabs, with a further insulation of cork.
The plan at the back of the Calendar shows the buildings
which have been erected and indicates the nature of their construction. It also shows their relation to the other groups of
buildings which are to be erected in the future.
PERMANENT BUILDINGS
Of the twelve buildings which have been erected, three
are of fire-proof construction, the Science Building, the Library,
and the Power House.
w
Science Building
The Science Building has been designed in the Tudor style,
this being a phase of English Gothic which lends itself fairly
readily to those adaptations which are necessary in order to meet
modern collegiate requirements. Externally, British Columbia
granite has been used throughout. Wherever possible plain wall
surfaces, consisting of the split faces of granite arranged in
random sizes with white joints, have been used. The general
grey tone is relieved by the use of a small quantity of field
stone of darker shades. All window openings are filled with
leaded glass in steel sashes. Internally, the building is finished
in brick work and tiles in pleasing tones of brown which harmonize with the oak panelled doors, the total effect in keeping
with that of the period it is designed to represent.
This building, which was designed for the sole use of
Chemistry ultimately, now accommodates the Departments of
Chemistry, Physics, Bacteriology and Nursing and Health. One
and one-half floors are devoted to Chemistry; an equivalent
assignment of space has been allotted to Physics, and half of one
floor has been set aside for Bacteriology, and Nursing and
Health. All lecture rooms and laboratories are well lighted,
and a system of forced ventilation has been installed throughout
the entire building. Distilled water, gas, steam, compressed air,
and electrical supply circuits have been provided wherever re- Location and Buildings 27
quired.    These services are carried in trenches in the floor, an
arrangement which facilitates any necessary repairs.
Ample provision has also been made for offices, balance
rooms, preparation rooms, apparatus rooms, supply rooms,
photographic rooms, technicians' rooms, and reading-room for
students.
Chemistry.—This Department is equipped with one large
and one small lecture room, a large laboratory for general
chemistry accommodating three hundred and forty students,
laboratories for elementary and advanced qualitative and
quantitative analysis, an elementary organic laboratory, an advanced organic laboratory and an organic combustion laboratory. A laboratory is available for agricultural chemistry,
another for industrial chemistry, and a commodious laboratory
for physical chemistry with an adjoining dark room for work
in photo-chemistry is found on the third floor. There are
also several small laboratories well equipped for research work.
Physics.—The Department of Physics has two large lecture
rooms, four large and several smaller laboratories, a constant
temperature room and a battery room. Three of the large
laboratories are equipped for the study of Elementary Physics,
Mechanics, and Heat and Electricity. The fourth is specially
designed for the conducting of experiments requiring the use
of highly sensitive apparatus. Smaller laboratories are designed
for light and X-ray experiments.
Bacteriology.—Provision has been made in this Department
for four laboratories. Two of these are for general student use,
one is for serological work and one is for advanced research.
In addition to laboratory and lecture room accommodation, an
office, a preparation room and a sterilization room have been
provided.
Nursing and Health.—The three rooms assigned to this
Department constitute a teaching unit such as is provided in
modern training schools for the instruction of nurses. All the
equipment   necessary   for   the   demonstration   of   elementary 28 The University of British Columbia
nursing procedure is available, and can be used for practice
teaching purposes.
Library Building
The central unit of the Library Building is a massive
structure of British Columbia granite which harmonizes with
the Science Building in its Gothic architectural lines. Owing
to the exigencies of the plan, however, the massing is more
broken, and thus better effects of light and shade are obtained.
Some tracery and stained glass in the upper portion of the building is employed to obtain in a restricted manner the richness
of detail characteristic of this style of architecture.
Internally, the same effect has been striven for, wherever
such an end was possible with due regard to economy. The
Main Entrance Hall has a groined ceiling with arches and wall
surface finished in Caen Stone plaster. This treatment is carried
up to the Main Concourse floor through the staircase Hall; the
lower portion of the Concourse walls is plastered with Caen
Stone, the quoins to windows and doors, and corbels to roof
trusses being finished in the same material. The roofs of the
Concourse and of the two reading rooms adjacent are finished
in native woods stained a dark brown, with patterae and shields
picked out in bright heraldic colours. Windows throughout the
building are of'leaded glass. In the Concourse and the inner
hall this is of a pale amber shade, with the coats of arms of the
Canadian Universities worked into the centre light. On the
window above the Loan Desk on the East Side of the Concourse
the armorial bearings of Oxford and Cambridge, as the oldest
universities of the Empire, are used as flanking emblems to those
of the University of British Columbia. The floors of the Main
Entrance Hall staircases and of the Concourse are finished with
large marbled rubber tiles which harmonize with the general
colour scheme, and ensure quietness in the principal parts of the
building. Plain oak of simple detail, stained to represent old
fumed oak, is used throughout for doors and other wood finish.
The principal reading room has a floor space of 100 ft. by
50 ft. and is 60 ft. in height.    Two other reading rooms, each Location and Buildings 29
60 ft. by 30 feet, open off the main reading room. These rooms
provide accommodation for 250 students. The sixth and seventh
tiers of the stack, not being required at present to house the
University book collection, are used as a periodical room, and
will accommodate about fifty readers. The Stack, which occupies the entire rear of the building, consists of seven tiers, four
of which are fully equipped with steel stacks of the latest design.
Here fifty-two semi-private study "carrels" facilitate research
for advanced students. The offices of the Librarian and the
Library Staff provide ample accommodation for receiving,
cataloguing and accessioning. The Faculty common room, the
"Browsing" room, and the Frank Burnett museum are also
located in this building. The Burnett collection represents the
arts, handicraft and weapons of Polynesia. This collection, which
has been presented by Mr. Burnett to the University, is the
result of numerous voyages made by him to the Central and
South Pacific Islands. It constitutes one of the finest collections
of this class of material yet accumulated by any private collector.
Power House
The Power House has been placed in the centre of the space
which will ultimately be the Engineering Quadrangle, and will
therefore eventually be masked by the future permanent buildings towards the Mall. For this reason it does not pretend to
follow very closely the style of the other permanent buildings
except in mass, being finished in rough case of broken texture,
relieved with red quarry tiles as diapers, copings, and offsets,
with windows grouped as far as possible to give pleasing proportions of voids and solids.
The ultimate development of this plant will be 2500 horsepower at normal rating. The present installation consists of
three units, each of 250 horse-power normal rating, capable of
developing 100 per cent, in excess of this. Each unit, so equipped
as to operate independently of the others, may act as a service
as well as an experimental station. In other words, on any one
boiler an experimental test may be conducted while the rest 30 The University of British Columbia
of the plant is cut in on the service lines. Instruments are provided to record every operation so that close checking and
comparisons of the performance of the different types of boilers
may be made to a degree.
The B. & W. Unit is equipped with B. & W. Natural Draft
Stoker, the Sterling Boiler with forced draft Coxe Travelling
Grate. The Kidwell with forced draft Coxe Travelling Grate is
also equipped with air pre-heater, by-passed, so that tests may
be conducted with or without pre-heated air. Induced draft is
used with individual forced draft fans; separate boiler feed
lines and pump with Linehart Scale provide boiler feed for
tests. A travelling weigh scale records the amount of coal used,
while a steam jet ash conveyor elevates the ashes to an overhead bunker.
The efficiency and flexibility of the plant lends itself to
economical operation, while the knowledge gained in the use of
different appliances will be of interest and value to power plant
users.
SEMI-PERMANENT BUILDINGS
In this group there are nine buildings in all—Administration, Auditorium and Grill room, Arts, Applied Science, Agriculture; three Engineering Buildings—Mechanical, Electrical;
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics; and the Forest Products
Laboratory Building. These buildings, which are set on concrete
foundations, are of frame construction with stucco finish, and
are designed for a life of forty years. Their exterior design
harmonizes with the permanent buildings so far as materials
of construction will permit. With the exception of a part of the
Engineering Laboratories, these buildings have been finished
internally with plaster and fir trim.
Administration Building
On the ground floor of this building are situated the offices
of the President, the Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science,
the Registrar, and the Bursar. On the second floor are two
large rooms, one for meetings of the Board of Governors and Location and Buildings 31
the  Senate,   and  the   other  for   meetings  of   Faculties   and
Committees.
Auditorium Building
The Auditorium Building is designed in a pleasing treatment of Renaissance architecture and is furnished with the most
modern equipment. It has a seating capacity of 1029, a large
and admirably equipped stage for the encouragement of dramatic presentations, an orchestra pit and adequate off-stage
dressing rooms. Provision has been made for the operating of
moving pictures, and the stage is equipped with a cyclorama and
all necessary electrical illumination devices.
The Grill room is situated in the basement and is designed
to accommodate 400 students at one time. There is also a small
dining room for the Faculty. The kitchen is furnished with the
latest cooking and baking equipment.
The bookstore, post office, medical offices, women's rest room,
students' council offices, and numerous committee rooms for subsidiary organizations are also located in this building.
Arts Building
In the Arts Building, which forms the centre of the semipermanent group, are located the lecture rooms and offices for
the following Departments in the Faculty of Arts and Science:
Classics, Economics, Sociology and Political Science, Education, English, History, Mathematics, Modern Languages and
Philosophy.
The lecture rooms, 16 in number, are well designed and
exceptionally well lighted. The largest room accommodates 250
students; the seating capacity of the others ranges from 32 to
64. Four common rooms for the undergraduates in Arts and
Science are located in this building, as is also the office of the
Dean of Women.
Applied Science Building
This building houses the Departments of Geology, Botany,
Zoology, Forestry and the drafting rooms and offices for Civil 32 The University of British Columbia
Engineering. All the laboratories have been equipped with the
essential services. One large lecture room, providing accommodations for 250 students, and 11 smaller lecture rooms with a
seating capacity ranging from 25 to 112, are located in this
building. These will be used by the different Departments
jointly as class requirements may determine. Extensive provision has been made for drafting rooms and for the necessary
offices, preparation rooms, storage rooms, and photographic
rooms. A geological museum, a reading room and a common
room for students have also been provided.
Geology.—In addition to the necessary lecture rooms, the
Department of Geology has three large and well equipped laboratories, the Mineralogical, the Petrological and the Geological.
There are also two small research laboratories, one for graduate
students and one for the staff.
The Department workroom is well equipped for the preparation of specimens. The museum contains valuable collections
of illustrative material which supplements the extensive working
collections in the laboratories. The reading room is equipped
with books, separates, maps, photographs and slides for reference.
Botany.—The Botanical laboratories include a large junior
laboratory, a senior laboratory, two student research laboratories
and three private research rooms. These laboratories are used
for practical work in Botany and General Biology. A
Herbarium of over 15,000 sheets and a botanical garden containing over 1000 specimens of native plants furnish an abundance of material for class room and laboratory purposes.
Zoology.—This Department, which includes courses in
Entomology, has two large laboratories, a small research laboratory and two private laboratories, all well equipped. There is
also a room for class material, which will serve for a time as a
repository for museum collections and for specimens to be used
for illustration.
Forestry.—While the Department of Forestry has its own
laboratory for work in wood technology, its own class room Location and Buildings 33
and offices, it uses the laboratories of other Departments quite
extensively, notably those in Biology, Civil Engineering and
Forest Products. The Department possesses, in the forest belt
which has been preserved on the campus as a natural park, a
very valuable outdoor laboratory for forestry students.
Civil Engineering. — Well equipped and well lighted
draughting and designing rooms are available for all classes in
drawing, mapping, machine design and computation work. The
equipment necessary for all types of Civil Engineering work is
available. The hydraulic laboratory, which is situated in the
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building, is well equipped
for demonstrations and tests covering the main field of hydraulic
principles and machinery; while in the Forest Products Laboratory, which is at the disposal of students in Civil Engineering,
excellent facilities are available for extensive tests of timber,
cement and steel.
Agriculture Building
This building accommodates the Departments of Agronomy,
Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and Poultry Husbandry. The office and record rooms for the Farm Survey
studies are also located in this building.
The lecture rooms, of which there are four, are exceptionally
well lighted. The largest accommodates 112 students, while the
seating capacity of the others ranges from 36 to 54.
In addition to lecture and laboratory accommodation, provision has been made for the necessary offices, preparation rooms,
storage rooms and also for a photographic dark room, a herd
book room, and a students' common room.
Agronomy.—This Department is provided with a combined
laboratory and lecture room which is equipped with water, gas
and electricity. While this room will be used for studies in
crop production, for the judging of specimens of plants and for
the determination of soil samples, the main emphasis will be laid
on the work conducted in the Department's outdoor laboratory—
the Agronomy fields. 34 The University of British Columbia
Animal Husbandry.—The different classes and types of
livestock constitute the main laboratory material of this department. In this material and in the farm survey records, the
Department possesses a wealth of data for teaching and illustration in farm management, livestock management, feed and
nutrition, and studies in pedigree and breeding.
Dairying.—The new laboratories of the Department of
Dairying provide facilities for conducting researches on the bacterial flora of milk, butter and cheese, and the relation of the
flora to the production and sale of high quality products. Excellent provision is made for the instruction of students in the work
indicated. Cheese-making and butter-making will be conducted
in the temporary dairy building; but the new laboratories
permit of closer contact of the various activities of the Department.
Horticulture.—In the laboratory provided for this Department, comprehensive studies supplement the practical experience
of the students in the propagation, planting, pruning and care of
horticultural crops. Materials for these purposes are provided
from the orchard, the ornamental trees, shrubs, nurseries, the
experimental flower plots, the campus plantings, and the recently
built greenhouse range which consists of several units devoted
to practical and research horticulture and to plant nutrition
studies.
A modernly-equipped research laboratory in the Agriculture
Building also enables both undergraduate and graduate students
to receive training in the technique of plant research.
Poultry Husbandry.—In the poultry laboratory in the Agriculture Building, facilities and equipment are provided to assist
in the study of poultry nutrition, disease, and other problems
related to the industry. On the poultry plant, which is the
main laboratory of the Poultry Department, ten pure breeds of
commercial importance are tested and bred for egg and meat
production. Experiments in management and marketing are
conducted with these birds and their products. Location and Buildings 35
Mechanical and Electrical Buildings
The Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
is housed in two large buildings. In both will be found the
most up-to-date equipment, enabling students to obtain a
thorough experimental knowledge of all phases of the work in
these departments. The mechanical laboratory contains a
modern 3-ton CO2 refrigerating plant; a large Corliss engine; a
two-stage air-compressor with inter-cooler; a 50 H.P. Mirrlees
Bickerton & Day pure Diesel engine with Froude water brake;
a De Laval Steam Turbine and D. C. generator with condenser;
a gasoline engine and generator; a Crossley two-stroke oil engine
and a National gas engine. A complete equipment exists for
testing calorific values of fuel oils and coals, and also for
testing exhaust gases of engines. There are also two steam
engines, one a single cylinder engine and the other a compound
engine. The mechanical students have available also the powerhouse equipment for testing, which consists of three 250 H.P.
boilers—a Kidwell, a Babcock & Wilcox, and a Sterling. In
addition, a 250-K.W. compound engine and generator and every
variety of pump is available for experimental work.
The Electrical laboratory is entirely modern, and contains
a 3-phase synchronous motor, driving a 75-K.W. compound
wound generator with static balancer. There is a three-phase
rotary converter with reactance control and panels, and a Deri
brush-shifting repulsion motor; a three-phase shunt commutator motor of the Schrage type, several squirrel cage and slip-
ring induction motors, a three-phase alternator and D.C. motor;
two-level compound D.C. generators on the same base. Another
machine, specially designed for us by the Cerlikon Company
serves as three-phase shunt and series commutator motor, single-
phase repulsion, three-phase induction motor, three-phase rotary
converter, and is intended to illustrate the principles of most of
the A.C. commutator motors. There is also a small induction
motor with a condenser attached to illustrate power factor improvement.
There are also series, shunt and compound wound D. C.
motors and an induction regulator, a single-phase rotary con- 36 The University of British Columbia
verier; a Winter-Eichberg single-phase commutator motor;
several transformers; a mercury-arc rectifier; an oscillograph
of the Duddell type; a cathode-ray oscillograph of the General
Electric type; a Campbell inductometer and complete equipment for high frequency bridge-testing. An alternating current
potentiometer made by Tinsley, Gall's patent, exists for
standardizing work, and also vacuum tube instruments for
obtaining characteristics of tubes. In addition, a large amount
of equipment is available for carrying out all the junior tests,
including potentiometers, standard bridges, iron testing,
Epstein iron tester, ballistic galvanometers and other instruments.
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building
The Mining and Metallurgical laboratories cover a total area
of 5000 square feet. The Ore Dressing laboratory, which includes a workshop, storage room and flotation room, is well
equipped with a variety of small scale machines, including
crusher, rolls, screens, jigs, ball mill and tables. The laboratory
is fully wired for power and light, and has large water mains
and drains, and a two-ton travelling crane. The Metallurgical
laboratory includes a fire assay room, with oil, gasoline and
gas furnaces; a wet assay room, with large fan-draught hood,
and work benches fitted for electric and gas heating; two balance
rooms; a photographic dark room; and ample storage space.
The Hydraulics laboratory is well equipped for tests and
demonstrations of high and low pressure hydraulic machines
and pumps. A 60-horse-power D. C. motor is utilized to drive
either a 10-inch single stage centrifugal pump having a capacity
of 2400 gallons per minute against a 70-foot head, or to drive a
4-inch two stage pump having a capacity of 525 gallons per
minute against a 325-foot head. The water from the large pump
can be used to drive a 10-inch vertical reaction turbine, while
the flow from the high pressure pump can be used to drive an
18-ineh Pelton Wheel, thus providing students with actual
working demonstrations of all the ordinary types of machines.
Installations include apparatus for weir,  nozzle,  and  orifice Location and Buildings 37
measurements, flow in pipes, tests and demonstrations of Ven-
turi, current and service meters. One section of the laboratory
is set apart for making the standard tests of cement and sand.
Forest Products Laboratory Buildings
The three buildings included in this group were erected by
the University for the use of the Vancouver Forest Products
Laboratory of the Dominion Forest Service. They consist of a
main building for offices and laboratories, an air-seasoning
building, and an experimental dry-kiln building.
Under a joint agreement between the University and the
Department of the Interior, the University, besides providing
the buildings, furnishes heat, light, and power, without cost to
the Dominion Government. The Dominion Forest Service has
undertaken to supply the personnel and to furnish all equipment.
Facilities already established include a large timber testing
laboratory, a special building for lumber seasoning, an experimental dry-kiln building equipped with oil-fired steam plant
and automatic temperature and humidity controller, a combined
photographic and pathological laboratory, a carpenter shop,
and suitable offices. Accommodation is also provided for an
entomologist of the Federal Department of Agriculture. The
testing laboratory is equipped with machines ranging from a
200,000-pound Olsen Universal to the most delicate balances. 38 The University of British Columbia
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Session
The academic year begins on the First of September and
ends on the last day of August. The Winter Session is divided
into two terms—the first, September to December; the second,
January to May. The Summer Session consists of seven weeks'
instruction in July and August, for which preparatory reading
is required except in certain cases. (See Summer Session
"Announcement.") For "Admission to the University" see
Page 42, and for "Registration and Attendance" see Page 45.
Courses of Study
For the Session of 1930-31 the University offers instruction
in each of the three Faculties, Arts and Science, Applied Science
(including Nursing), and Agriculture, leading to the degrees
of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Commerce, Bachelor of Applied
Science and Bachelor of Science in Agriculture. In addition a
course is given in the Faculty of Arts and Science leading to a
Diploma of Social Service, and a Teacher Training Course is
offered for graduates of the Faculties of Arts and Science and
Applied Science. It is also possible to proceed to a Master's
degree in each Faculty. Advanced courses of instruction and
facilities for research are offered to students who are graduates
of any University or College of recognized standing. Admission
to these advanced courses, or to the privileges of research, does
not in itself imply admission to candidacy for a higher degree.
Academic Dress
The undergraduate's gown is black in colour and of the
ordinary stuff material, of ankle length, and with long sleeves
and the yoke edged with khaki cord. The graduate's gown is the
same, without cord. The Bachelor's hood is of the Cambridge
pattern, black bordered with the distinctive colour of the particular Faculty; the Master's hood is the same, lined with the
distinctive colour. The colours are, for Arts and Science, the
University blue; for Applied Science, red; for Agriculture,
maize. General Information 39
University Health Service
The University Campus is situated within the University
Endowment Lands, which, as unorganized territory, comes
under the direct control of the Provincial Government. Shortly
after the opening of the present University Buildings in 1925,
the Lieutenant-Governor in Council, by the recommendation of
the Provincial Health Officer, appointed a Medical Health Officer
for the Reserve, including the University Campus. This Health
Officer has on the Campus and' in the Reserve all the powers of
any Health Officer anywhere.
In the fall of 1927, the Provincial Health Officer added to
the University Health Service a Public Health Nurse, whose
presence permits the continuous operation of a local Health
Department on the Campus and Reserve.
In addition, the Public Health Nurse is engaged by the
University for the general supervision of the individual health
of the students, first aid, etc. An office for the Public Health
Nurse is provided in the Auditorium Building and, by the gift
of the Graduating Class of 1927, has been equipped with first
aid furniture and supplies.
Physical Examination.—In order to promote the physical
welfare of the student body, every student, on entering the University, is required to undergo a physical examination, to be
conducted by, or under the direction of, the University Medical
Examiner. Physical defects and weaknesses, amenable to treatment, may thus be discovered, and the student is advised to
apply to his physician for such remedial measures as his case
may require. About 10 to 15 per cent, of the students are
re-examined in their second and subsequent years.
Rules Governing Medical Examinations.— (1) Students must
present themselves for medical examination on the date and at
the time assigned by the University Health Service. (2) Students failing to report on the right date or reporting on a wrong
date lose their assignment and must at once secure another
from the University Health Service.    (3) Students who do not 40 The University of British Columbia
conform to the above regulations will be reported to the University Health Committee.
Infectious Diseases.—Students developing any illness or suffering from any injury while on the Campus should apply for
first aid to the Public Health Nurse. This is particularly required if the student develops any illness of an infectious nature.
Provision is made also for the diagnosis of the infectious cases
and their safe removal to suitable quarters.
Students developing any illness or suffering any injury
while at home, boarding house,, fraternity house, etc,., are
required to report the same to the Public Health Nurse. The
development of any infectious disease in a University student
must be reported by the student to the Medical Health Officer
of the University without delay.
Students exposed to any infectious disease must immediately
report to the Medical Health Officer. Such students may be
permitted, by special order of the Medical Health Officer, to
attend the University for a prescribed period, despite the
exposure.
Such students shall report daily (or oftener, at the discretion of the Medical Health Officer), to the Public Health
Nurse for such prescribed period. Failure to so report will
result in immediate exclusion from the University.
University Employment Bureau
The objects of the Employment Bureau are to provide
students with summer employment, to provide part-time work
for students during the Winter Session, and to help students
in obtaining positions after graduation. This service is for
employers seeking help and for students desiring employment.
Those who know of positions vacant are requested to notify the
Bureau. Correspondence should be addressed to the Employment Bureau, Registrar's Office.
Dean of Women
During the session the Dean of Women may be consulted by
parents and students on matters pertaining to living conditions, General Information 41
vocational guidance, and other questions that directly affect the
social and intellectual life of the women students.
Board and Residence
A list of approved boarding-houses, within a short distance
of the University, which receive men or women students, but
not both, may be obtained from the Registrar after September
1st. Men and women students are not permitted to lodge in the
same house, unless they are members of the same family, or
receive special permission from the Senate. Women students
under twenty-five years "of age are permitted to occupy suites
in apartment houses only when accompanied by some older person. Any such arrangement must be made in consultation with
the Dean of Women. The cost of good board and lodging is
from $35 per month upwards; of a room alone, $8 to $12 per
month. A grill is operated under the supervision of the University, and lunch, afternoon tea and light supper may be
obtained there at very reasonable prices. Refreshments at social
functions are also supplied.
General Conduct
The University authorities do not assume responsibilities
which naturally rest with parents. This being so, it is the
policy of the University to rely on the good sense and on the
home training of students for the preservation of good moral
standards. 42 The University of British Columbia
ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY
All inquiries relating to admission to the University should
be addressed to the Registrar.
The accommodation for students in the University is limited.
The University therefore, reserves the right to limit the attendance.
1. Except under special circumstances no student under the
age of sixteen is admitted to the University. For admission to
the course in Nursing a student must be seventeen years of age,
and for admission to any course in Social Service, twenty-one
years of age.
2. Candidates for admission to the courses in the First
Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science or the Faculty of
Agriculture and to the course in Nursing in Applied Science are
required to pass the Junior Matriculation Examination of the
Province of British Columbia or to submit certificates showing
that they have passed an equivalent examination elsewhere.
Students over 18 years of age with full "Normal Entrance"
standing who hold Normal School certificates are admitted to
the University as having full Junior Matriculation standing.
Special regulations are prescribed for admission to courses in
Applied Science, and are given under the heading of "Admission" in the Applied Science Section of the Calendar.
3. Students who have passed the Senior Matriculation
Examination are admitted to the courses of the Second Year
in the Faculty of Arts and Science. Students who have partial
Senior Matriculation standing, obtained in 1927 or subsequently, will be granted credit in First Year Arts in each subject in which they have made 50 per cent, or over, or in each
paper in which they have made 50 per cent, or over in so far
as these papers correspond with those of First Year Arts.
4. Certificates or diplomas showing that a candidate has
passed the Matriculation Examination of another University will
be accepted in lieu of the Junior or Senior Matriculation Examinations if the Faculty concerned considers that the examination Admission to The University 43
has covered the same subjects and required the same standard.
If, however, the examination covers some but not all of the
necessary subjects the candidate will be required to pass the
Matriculation Examination in the subjects not covered.
5. A candidate who wishes to enter by certificates other
than a Matriculation certificate issued in British Columbia
should submit to the Registrar the original certificates. If he
wishes these returned to him, he must present also a copy of
each certificate for record at the University. He should under
no circumstances come to the University without having first
obtained from the Registrar a statement of the value of the
certificates he holds, as these' may lack one or more essential
subjects, or the work done in a subject may not be adequate, or,
again, the percentage gained may not be sufficiently high.
Moreover, it must be remembered that a certificate may admit
to one Faculty and not to another. When an applicant's
diploma or certificate does not show the marks obtained in the
several subjects of the examination he must arrange to have a
statement of his marks sent to the Registrar by the Education
Department or University issuing such diploma or certificate.
The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. This fee must
accompany the application.
6. A student of another University applying for exemption
from any subject or subjects which he has already studied is
required to submit with his application a Calendar of the
University in which he has previously studied, together with a
complete statement of the course he has followed and a certificate
of the standing gained in the several subjects.* The Faculty
concerned will determine the standing of such a student in this
University. The fee for the examination of certificates is $2.00.
This fee must accompany the application.
7. A student who has a failure in a subject of the Junior
Matriculation examination standing against him will not be
admitted to the University.
*For the conditions under which exemption is granted in the Faculty of Arts
and Science, see "Courses Leading to the Degree of B.A." 44 The University of British Columbia
8. The Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations of
the Province of British Columbia are conducted by the High
School and University Matriculation Board of the Province.
This Board consists of members appointed by the Department
of Education and by the University. The requirements for
Matriculation may be obtained in the publication, "Requirements for Matriculation," issued by the University, or in the
"Programme of Studies for the High and Technical Schools,"
issued by the Department of Education. Registration and Attendance 45
REGISTRATION AND ATTENDANCE
Those who intend to register as students of the University
are required to make application to the Registrar, on forms to
be obtained at the Registrar's office. This application should be
made early in August, or as soon as the results of the Matriculation examinations are known. For First Year students in the
Faculties of Arts and Science, and Agriculture, and for other
students coming to the University for the first time, the last day
for registration is Wednesday, September 17th, and for all other
undergraduate students, Friday, September 19th, 1930. (See
regulations in reference to "Admission to the University," page
42.)
1. There are four classes of students:—
(a) Graduate students—Students who are pursuing courses
of study in a Faculty in which they hold a degree,
whether they are proceeding to a Master's degree or
not.
(b) Full undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree
in any Faculty who have passed all the examinations
precedent to the year in which they are registered.
(c) Conditioned undergraduates—Students proceeding to
a degree with defects in their standing which do not
prevent their entering a higher year under the regulations governing "Examination and Advancement"
of the Faculty in which they are registered.
(d) Partial students—Students not belonging to one of the
three preceding classes.    (See 7, below.)
2. All students other than graduate students are required
to register at the office of the Registrar on or before the last day
for registration, to furnish the information necessary for the
University records, to enrol for the particular classes which they
wish to attend, and to sign the following declaration:
"I hereby accept and submit myself to the statutes, rules,
regulations, and ordinances of The University of British Colum- 46 The University of British Columbia
bia, and of the Faculty or Faculties in which I am registered,
and to any amendments thereto which may be made while I
am a student of the University, and I promise to observe the
same.''
In the information furnished for the University records,
students are requested to state what churches they propose to
make their place of worship. This information is available for
any of the city churches desiring it.
3. After the above dates a fee of $2.00 will be charged for
late registration.
4. Students registering for the first time must present the
certificates which constitute their qualification for admission
to the course of study for which they wish to register. The
Registrar is empowered to register all duly qualified students.
Doubtful cases will be dealt with by the Faculty concerned.
5. Students doing work in two academic years will register
in the lower year and fill out their course cards in such a way
as to make clear which courses are required to complete the
lower year.
6. Students desiring to make a change in the course for
which they have registered must apply to the Registrar on the
proper form for a "change of course." Except in special circumstance, no change will be allowed after the fifteenth day of
the session. If the application is approved by the Faculty concerned, the Registrar will give the necessary notifications.
7. Partial students, who are not proceeding to a degree,
are not normally required to pass an examination for admission,
but before registering they must produce a certificate showing
that they have satisfied the Dean and the Heads of the Departments concerned that they are qualified to pursue with advantage the course of study which they propose to undertake.
8. Students are required to attend at least seven-eighths,
of the lectures in each course that they take. Lectures will commence on the hour, and admission to a lecture or laboratory Registration and Attendance 47
and credit for attendance may be refused by the Instructor for
lateness, misconduct, inattention or neglect of duty. Absence
consequent on illness or domestic affliction may be excused only
by the Dean of the Faculty concerned, and medical certificates
or other evidence must be presented immediately on return to
University work. A medical certificate must show the nature
and the period of the disability. Medical report forms may be
obtained from the Dean's office. In cases of deficient attendance
students may (with the sanction of the Dean and the Head of
the Department concerned) be excluded from the Christmas or
the final examination in a course; but, in the case of a final
examination, unless the unexcused absences exceed one-fourth
of the total number of lectures in a course, such students may
be permitted to sit for supplemental examination. (See regulations in each Faculty in reference to "Examinations and
advancement.")
^^.   At4 48 The University of British Columbia
FEES
All cheques must be certified and made payable to "The
University of British Columbia."
The sessional fees are as follows:
For Full and Conditioned Undergraduates
, In Arts and Science—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 6th $50.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 19th.~ 50.00
 $100.00
In Social Service Course—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 6th $50.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 19th_ 50.00
 $100.00
In Teacher Training Course— t
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 6th $30.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 19th... 30.00
 $ 60.00
In Applied Science—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 6th $75.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 19th 75.00
 $150.00
In Nursing and Public Health—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 6th $50.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 19th.. 50.00
 $100.00
NOTE:—For Third and Fourth Year students in Nursing the Sessional fee is
$1.00, payable, with the Alma Mater fee of $10.00, on or before October 8th.
Students admitted to Nursing B or C and proceeding to the Certificate on a
basis of part-time attendance over two or more years, will pay the regular fee
for the whole course, but the amount payable each year will be pro-rated to
correspond with the proportion of work taken in that year.
In Agriculture—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 6th $50.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 19th... 50.00
 $100.00
Alma Mater Fee—Payable on or before Oct. 6th $ 10.00
Caution Money—Payable on or before Oct. 6th      5.00 Fees 49
For Partial Students
Fees, per '' Unit''— $ 10.00
First half payable on or before Oct. 6th.
Balance payable on or before Jan. 19th.
Alma Mater Fee—Payable on or before Oct. 6th $ 10.00
Caution Money—Payable on or before Oct. 6th      5.00
For Students in Saturday Morning, Late Afternoon
and Evening Classes
Fees, per B-Unit Course— $ 26.00
First half payable on or before Oct. 6th.
Balance payable on or before Jan. 19th.
For Graduates
Registration and Class Fees-—Payable on or before Oct. 6th.
First Registration $ 25.00
Each subsequent Session ...._       2.00
After these dates an additional fee of $2.00 will be exacted
of all students in default.
The Alma Mater Fee is a fee exacted from all students
for the support of the Alma Mater Society. It was authorized
by the Board of Governors at the request of the students themselves.
The Caution Money is a deposit from which deductions
will be made to cover breakages, wastage, and use of special
materials in laboratories, etc. If the balance to the credit of a
student falls below $1.50, a further deposit of $5.00 may be
required.
Immediately after October 6th and January 19th, the
Bursar will notify students who have not paid their fees that
steps will be taken to ensure their exclusion from classes while
the fees remain unpaid.
Students registering after October 6th shall pay their fees
at the time of registration, failing which they become subject
to the provisions of the preceding Regulation. 50 The University of British Columbia
Students borrowing books from the University Library for
Preparatory Reading courses, will be required to make the usual
deposit of two dollars ($2.00), with the Librarian to cover
mailing cost.
For Summer Session Students
Fees are payable on registration, otherwise an additional
fee of $2.00 will be exacted.
For students registering in October for preparatory work
one-half of the fees is payable on registration, and the balance
at the beginning of the Summer Session in the following July.
Minimum fee _._ _ $20.00
For three units (at the rate' of $13 for iy2 units) 26.00
For six units _ _  52.00
Summer Session Association - ~    1.00
Special Fees
Regular supplemental examination, per
paper    _ _ _ $ 5.00
Special examination, per paper    7.50
Re-reading, per paper   _     2.00
Graduation    _ _  20.00
Supplemental examination fees must be paid two weeks
before the examination, special examination fees and fees for
re-reading when application is made, and graduation fees two
weeks before Congregation. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 51
MEDALS, SCHOLARSHIPS, PRIZES, BURSARIES
AND LOANS FOR 1930-31
MEDALS
The Governor-General's Gold Medal
A gold medal, presented by His Excellency the Governor-
General of Canada, will be awarded to the student standing at
the head of the graduating class in the Faculty of Arts and
Science.   Honour and pass students may compete for this medal.
The Historical Society Gold Medal
A gold medal, donated by E. W. Keenleyside, Esq., and
known as the Historical Society Gold Medal, will be open to the
members of the graduating class. The award will be made by
the Department of History, on the basis of the student's standing in the courses in History which he has taken during his
undergraduate course, and the general interest he has shown in
the subject.
The French Government Medal
A bronze medal, offered by the French Consul for Western
Canada on behalf of the French Government, will be awarded
to a student of the French language on the recommendation of
the Head of the Department of Modern Languages.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR POST-GRADUATE STUDIES
University Scholarship
A  scholarship   of  $200   may   be   awarded  to  a  graduate
student who shows special aptitude for post-graduate studies.
Application must be made to the Registrar not later than the
last day of the final examinations.
The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, given by the Faculty Women's
Club of the University, is open to graduates of this University
who intend in the following year to pursue post-graduate study
in this or any other approved university. Application must
be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final
examinations. 52' The University of British Columbia
The Captain LeRoy Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $250, donated by the Universities
Service Club, will be awarded for the academic year 1930-31
to a returned soldier student in attendance at the University of
British Columbia. Applications may be made by returned soldier
students who intend doing work in the Second or any later
year at The University of British Columbia, or post-graduate
work at any approved institution. Each application must contain a statement of the academic record, the war record, and
the special claims of the applicant, with two supporting references, and must be made to the Registrar not later than the
last day of the final examinations.
The award will be made by Senate, upon recommendation
of Faculty acting in consultation with the Executive of the
Universities Service Club.
The French Government Scholarship
A scholarship of 10,000 francs is donated by the French
Government for one year's post-graduate study in France. It
is tenable for one year and is contingent upon the voting of the
credits for the year by the French Chambers. (This contingency
applies to every item of the French budget and, practically, the
scholarship may be considered as permanent.)
The award is made by the French Consul for Western
Canada, residing in Vancouver, on the recommendation of the
Head of the Department of French in the University. Applications must be made to the Registrar not later than the last
day of the final examinations.
The Nichol Scholarship
By the generosity of the late Hon. Walter Nichol—Lieutenant-Governor of the Province, 1921 to 1926,—five three-year
scholarships, each of the annual value of $1,200, have been made
available for study in the University of France, or at one of the
other institutions of higher education in France. With each
scholarship has been given a gold medal, the permanent posses- Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 53
sion of the successful candidate. The fifth scholarship having
been awarded in May, 1929, there will be no further award,
except by way of renewal.
The intention of the donor being the development in
Canada, and particularly in this Province, of a wider knowledge
of the people of France, their ideals, literature, art and science,
and the promotion thereby of a better mutual understanding
between French and British in this country, each successful
candidate must undertake to return to British Columbia to
practise his profession for such time as seems reasonable in the
opinion of the Senate of the University.
Each scholarship may be held for three years, provided the
holder can show from year to year satisfactory progress in the
course of study undertaken.
The Brock Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, donated by Dean R. W. Brock, may
be awarded to a graduate student in Applied Science who shows
special aptitude for post-graduate studies. Applications must
be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the
final examinations. .
The H. R. MacMillan Scholarship
Beginning in 1929 a scholarship of $1,000, together with a
free return passage to Japan or Australia, donated by H. R.
MacMillan, Esq., Vancouver, B. C, will be awarded each year
for three years to graduate students of the University. The
holder will study economic conditions and investigate the fundamentals of present and prospective trade between Western
Canada and Japan or Australia, and make known to the public
of Western Canada the results of such study.
Applications must be made to the Registrar not later than
the last day of the final examinations.
The 1851 Exhibition Scholarship
Under the revised conditions for the award of the 1851
Exhibition Scholarship in Science, The University of British 54 The University of British Columbia
Columbia is included in the list of universities from which
nominations for scholarships allotted to Canada may be made.
These scholarships of £250 per annum, are tenable, ordinarily,
for two years. They are granted only to British subjects under
26 years of age, who have been bona fide students of pure or
applied science of not less than three years' standing. Application should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day
of the final examinations.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR UNDERGRADUATES
1. IN ALL FACULTIES
The Rhodes Scholarship
An annual scholarship at one of the colleges of Oxford is
assigned by the trustees of the late Mr. Cecil J. Rhodes to the
Province of British Columbia. Each scholarship is tenable for
three years, and is of the value of £400 a year. In accordance
with the wish of Mr. Rhodes, the election of candidates will
depend upon (1) Force of character, devotion to duty, courage,
sympathy, capacity for leadership; (2) Ability and scholastic
attainments; (3) Physical vigor, as shown by participation in
games or in other ways. A candidate must be a British subject,
with at least five years' domicile in Canada, and unmarried.
He must have passed his nineteenth but not his twenty-fifth
birthday on October 1st of the year for which he is elected. He
must be at least in his Sophomore Year in some recognized
degree-granting university or college of Canada, and (if elected)
complete the work of that year before coming into residence at
Oxford. He may compete either in the province in which he has
acquired any considerable part of his educational qualification,
or in the province in which he has his ordinary private domicile,
home, or residence.
Candidates for the 1931 scholarship must have their applications, with all the required material, in the hands of the
Secretary of the Selection Committee not later than October
20th, 1930. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 55
The Khaki University and Young Men's Christian Association
Memorial Fund Scholarships
The sum of $12,000, given to the University by the administrators of the Khaki University of Canada, provides a fund
which has so far been used to assist returned soldiers in actual
need of money to complete their courses. Out of the income
from this fund, ten scholarships of $75 each are now to be
offered each year for a period of five years, beginning with the
spring of 1927. They are to be awarded, on the results of
examinations in all years but the final, in all faculties, to such
returned soldiers or dependents of soldiers as have the requisite
academic standing; failing such, to the student body at large.
All returned soldiers and all children of soldiers of the Great
War who have any expectation of attaining scholarship standing in these years should apply to the Registrar on a special
form not later than the last day of the final examinations.
The Captain LeRoy Memorial Scholarship
(See Page 52)
University Scholarships
Two scholarships of $150 each may be awarded to returned
soldiers taking the work of the First Year, the award to be
based on the work of the year.
2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
University Scholarships
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each will be
awarded to students proceeding to the Fourth Year, the award
to be based on the work of the Third Year.
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each will be
awarded to students proceeding to the Third Year, the award
to be based on the work of the Second Year.
The Shaw Memorial Scholarship*
This scholarship of $137.50, founded by friends of the late
James Curtis Shaw, Principal of Vancouver College, and after-
"Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that
body, with the consent of the donors, to The University of British Columbia. 56 The University of British Columbia
wards of McGill University College, Vancouver, will be paid
throughout his undergraduate course to any child of the late
Principal Shaw who is in regular attendance at the University
as a fully matriculated student; when there is no such candidate,
it will be awarded upon the results of the examination of the
Second Year in Arts and Science to the undergraduate student
standing highest in any two of the following three subjects,
English, Latin, Greek, and proceeding to the work of the Third
Year.
The McGill Graduates' Scholarship*
A scholarship of $137.50, founded by the McGill Graduates'
Society of British Columbia, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in English and French of
the Second year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the
work of the Third Year.
The Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $110, founded by the members of the
Terminal City Club as a memorial to those members of the
Club who lost their lives in the Great War, will be awarded
to the undergraduate student standing highest in English and
Economics of the Second Year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the work of the Third Year.
The Imperial Order Daughters of the Empire
Scott Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $110—the proceeds of an endowment
of $2,000—founded by the Imperial Order of the Daughters of
the Empire of the City of Vancouver, in memory of Captain
Robert Falcon Scott, the Antarctic explorer, who sacrificed his
life in the cause of Science, will be awarded for general proficiency in biological subjects to the student who has completed
his Second Year in Arts and Science, and who is proceeding in
the Third Year to Honour work either in Biology or in a course
including Biology.
*Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that
body, with the consent of the donors, to The University of British Columbia. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 57
Royal Institution Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to the student taking
first place in the examinations of the First Year in Arts and
Science.
University Scholarships
Two scholarships of $150 each will be awarded on the examinations of the First Year in Arts and Science, one to the student
taking second place and the other to the student taking third
place in general proficiency.
The P. E. O. Sisterhood Scholarship
A scholarship of $75, given by Vancouver Chapters of the
P.E.O. Sisterhood, will be awarded to the woman student
standing highest in English in the First Year of the Faculty
of Arts and Science.
The Beverley Cayley Scholarship
A scholarship of $100.00, given by His Honour Judge
Cayley and Mrs. Cayley in memory of their son, Beverley Cayley, Arts '18, will be awarded to the male student standing
highest in English in the First Year of the Faculty of Arts
and Science. aP^
The I. J. Klein Scholarship
This scholarship of $100 a year for ten years, beginning in
May, 1930, is donated by I. J. Klein, Esq., Vancouver, B. C,
and will be awarded to the student obtaining first place in the
examination of the Third Year of the Course in Commerce.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $110 is offered by the Club to be awarded
to the student obtaining first place in the subject, Canadian
History.
3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE
University Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded for general proficiency  in  previous  work  in  this  University,   to  a  student 58 The University of British Columbia
proceeding to the Third Year of the Course in Nursing and
Health and having successfully completed the hospital probationary period. Applications shall be made to the Registrar not
later than September 1st.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $100 is offered by the Club to be awarded
to the student who attains the highest standing in the first four
years' training, academic and practical, of the Nursing and
Health course.
The Dunsmuir Scholarship*
A scholarship of $165, founded by the Hon. James Dunsmuir, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing
highest in the Mining Engineering Course of the Fourth Year
in Applied Science and proceeding to the work of the Fifth
Year.
University Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to a student proceeding to the Fourth Year in Applied Science, the award to be
based on the work of the Third Year.
Royal Institution Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded for general proficiency in the work of the Second Year in Applied Science.
4. IN AGRICULTURE
The British Columbia Fruit Growers' Association Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, donated by the British Columbia
Fruit Growers' Association, will be awarded to a student, preferably of the Third Year, who is specializing in Horticulture.
The award will be based on proficiency not only in horticultural
subjects, but in the entire work of the year.
•Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that
body, with the consent of the donors, to The University of British Columbia. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 59
University Scholarship
A scholarship in Agriculture of $150 will be awarded to a
student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be based
on the work of the First Year.
The David Thom Scholarship
A scholarship in Agriculture of $100 will be awarded to
a student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be based
on the work of the First Year.
MATRICULATION SCHOLARSHIPS
University Scholarship
One scholarship of $150 will be awarded upon the results of
the Senior Matriculation Examination.
Royal Institution Scholarships
Seven General Proficiency scholarships will be awarded on
the result of the Junior Matriculation examinations: (a) $150
to the candidate of highest standing in the Province, and (b)
$100 to the candidate of next highest standing in each of the
following districts: (1) Victoria District, (2) Vancouver Island
(exclusive of Victoria District) and Northern Mainland, (3)
Vancouver Central District (comprising the former limits of
the City of Vancouver), (4) The Lower Mainland (exclusive of
Vancouver Central District but including Agassiz), (5) Yale,
(6) Kootenays.
These scholarships will be paid only to students in attendance at The University of British Columbia. Under certain
conditions they may be reserved for limited periods. A winner
who is completing Senior Matriculation in a high school of the
same district may have the scholarship reserved for one year,
subject to obtaining satisfactory standing in the Senior Matriculation examination. Also a winner who completes the first two
years of the Arts course in an affiliated institution may have
the scholarship reserved for two years.    Sums accruing from 60 The University of British Columbia
unpaid scholarships may be used in the form of bursaries or
loans.
PRIZES
1. IN ALL FACULTIES
The University Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, open to all students of the
University, will be awarded for an essay on a special literary
subject, to be announced at the beginning of the Session by the
Department of English.
The Players' Club Prize
A prize of $50, donated by the Players' Club, is offered for
an original play suitable for the Club's Christmas performance.
The award will be made on the recommendation of the Faculty
members of the Advisory Board of the Players' Club.
The Isabel Ecclestone Mackay Prize
A prize of $25 from the estate of the late Mrs. Isabel Ecclestone Mackay will be awarded to the student of the University
who submits an original poem in the English language which
shall be deemed of sufficient merit, the award to be made upon
the decision of the Head of the Department of English.
Poems entered for this competition must be in the hands of
the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations.
2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
The Gerald Myles Harvey Prize
A book prize of the value of $50, given by Mr. J. Newton
Harvey in memory of his son, Gerald Myles Harvey, who died
on active service, will be awarded to the student in Arts and
Science who submits the best essay on a subject in Economics
or Political Science which concerns British Columbia or Canada
as a whole. A list of suggested subjects for 1930-31 may be
obtained from the Department of Economics, but competitors
may write on any subject approved by the Department and by Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 61
the donor of the prize, and essays written in the course of
University work, if so approved, may be submitted for the
prize. Intending competitors must notify the Department of
Economics before the 31st of December, 1930, of their intention
to compete.
The Vancouver Women's Conservative Association Prize
This prize of $25, given by the Vancouver Women's Conservative Association, is open to students taking the Mathematics
of the First Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science. In
awarding it preference will be given to the son or daughter of
a soldier, provided satisfactory standing is secured in the
subject.
The French Government Book Prize
A book prize, offered by the French Consul for Western
Canada on behalf of the French Government, will be awarded
to a student of the French language on the recommendation of
the Head of the Department of Modern Languages.
3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE
The Convocation Prize
A prize of $50, donated by Convocation of The University
of British Columbia, will be awarded annually to the student
obtaining first place in the Fifth Year of Applied Science.
The Walter Moberly Memorial Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, donated by the Vancouver
Branch of the Engineering Institute of Canada in memory of
the late Walter Moberly, will be awarded for the best engineering thesis submitted by any Fifth Year student in the Faculty
of Applied Science.
The Engineering Profession's Prizes
Five book prizes, each of the value of $25, are offered by
the Engineering Profession in British Columbia (Association of 62 The University of British Columbia
Professional Engineers) for competition by those students in the
Fourth Year of the Faculty of Applied Science who are registered as engineering pupils according to the by-laws of the
Association.
The prizes are awarded for the best summer essays in any
five branches of engineering, to be selected and specified by the
Faculty.
The five successful essays may be made available by the
Faculty to the Council of the Engineering Profession and,
through the Council, may be referred to or quoted in the
literature of the Profession.
The Provincial Board of Health Prizes
The Provincial Board of Health of the Province of British
Columbia offers the sum of $100 in prizes for competition in
the Course in Public Health Nursing.
BURSARIES
The Canadian Club of Vancouver Bursary
Through the generosity of the Canadian Club of Vancouver,
a sum of $300 will be available in 1930-31 to assist worthy male
matriculants who would not otherwise be able to enter upon the
University course. Candidates must be British subjects. They
should make application for the award as soon as possible after
the announcement of matriculation results, and not later than
September 1st.
The American Women's Club Bursary
Through the generosity of the American Women's Club of
Vancouver a sum of $110 will be available for 1930-31 to assist
a student who has satisfactorily completed the First Year in
Arts and Science, and who could not otherwise continue the
course in the Second Year. Application must be made to the
Registrar not later than September 1st. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 63
The David Thom Bursary
From the funds of the David Thom Estate a sum of $60
is available annually to a student who has satisfactorily completed the work of the First Year in Agriculture and is proceeding to the work of the Second Year.
LOANS
Funds are provided from which loans, not to exceed $100,
may be made to undergraduate students who have completed
one year's University work and who are in need of pecuniary
assistance. Loans are not granted to graduate students nor to
students taking the Teacher Training Course. Applications for
loans should be addressed to the President of the University.
General Loan Funds
The General Loan Fund is maintained by annual grants
made by the Board of Governors.
The Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy
B. C. Division Fund
This is a cumulative fund of $50 per year, given by the
Institute to the University as a trust, to be used for loans to
students taking the mining course. Applicants for loans must
be recommended by the Departments of Geology, Mining and
Metallurgy.
The David Thom Fund
From the David Thom Estate funds a sum of $500 has
been set aside for loans to Third and Fourth Year students in
Agriculture. A loan from this fund will supplement one from
the existing University loan funds.
GENERAL REGULATIONS
1. Scholarships, medals, and prizes will be awarded at the
close of the session, and, in case of Matriculation Examinations,
after the June examination. 64 The University of British Columbia
2. If the award of a medal, scholarship, or prize is based
on an examination, no award will be made to a candidate who
obtains less than 75 per cent, of the possible marks.
3. Candidates are not permitted to hold more than one
scholarship each, although they may win more and will be given
credit in the published lists if they do. Scholarships thus won
but not held will pass to candidates next in order of merit, provided they have made the required marks.
4. Scholarships under the jurisdiction of the University are
paid in three instalments—on the 15th of November, the 15th
of January and the 15th of March. Normally this is during the
session following their award, and undergraduate winners must
continue their courses to the satisfaction of the Faculty concerned. But Faculty may permit a scholarship to be reserved a
year, provided the student shows satisfactory reasons for postponing attendance.
5. Winners of scholarships who desire to do so may resign
the monetary value, while the appearance of their names in the
University list enables them to retain the honour. Any funds
thus made available will be used for additional scholarships or
student loans. I
6. Medals, scholarships, prizes, bursaries and loans are open
to winter session students only, unless otherwise stated, and
marks obtained in summer session courses are not taken into
account in awarding them.
POST-GRADUATE AWARDS AND APPOINTMENTS
The University is in possession of a great deal of information regarding post-graduate scholarships, fellowships and
assistantships in other Universities, or as given by various
research bodies. Places are available in practically all departments of University work. Students wishing to pursue postgraduate work outside this University are advised to consult
the Registrar for information. THE        1^
FACULTY
OF
ARTS AND SCIENCE TIME TABLE
FACULTY OF ARTS
KEY TO BUILDINGS:   A, Arts; Ag, Ag
MORNINGS
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room ..
Wednesday
Room
Biology 2 	
Ap 101
AplOl
AplOl
S 300
Ap204
A 103,
106,205,
203, 206,
207
A 100
A 101,
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
A 102
A 202
A 204
A 208
A 201
Ap 100
S200
Botany 2	
Botany 4	
Commercial Law 1	
Economics 2	
AplOl
A 201
S300
Ap204
A 100
106,205,
206, 207
208, 203
A 101,
104, 105,
204
Apl02
A 108
A 202
A 103
A 102
AglOl
S200
Ap 101
AplOl
Ap 101
Biology 8 	
Botany 6 e.     	
AplOl
Ap 101
S800
Economics 6...- .	
Education. 	
Ap 204
English 1 b,
Sees. 1,2, 3,4,
5, 6, 7	
English 1 a.
Sec. 8, 9,10,11,
12,18...	
A 108,
Sees. 8, 9,10,11,
12,18 	
106, 203,
205, 206,
9
English 13 	
French 2
Geology 8 and 4 	
Greek 1  .._	
French 2,
English 13        	
French 2,
Sees, a, b, c d	
207
A 100
A 101
Geology 5 and 12	
German 1 a 	
German 4	
Latin 2 b, Sec. 1	
Latin 5....  	
Mathematics 17	
Physics 2, Sec. 1	
Zoology 2	
Zoology 3	
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
Greek l...._  . 	
Latin 7   —	
Mathematics 3_ .
Mathematics 10....	
Mathematics 18	
Philosophy 1 a. Sec. 1
Physics 1, Sec. 1	
A 102
Latin 7  .._	
A 202
Mathematics 8 	
Mathematics 10  .,_ ..
Mathematics 16
Philosophy 1 a. Sec. 1
Physics 1, Sec. 1	
A 204
A 208
A 201
AplOO
S200
Botany 5 a	
Chemistry 3	
AplOl
Ap 101
S 417
S 400
A 201
Ap 202
A 100
A 104
A 105
Ap 100
A 102
A 101
A 106
108, 203,
205, 206,
207
A 208
A 103
S 200
S 210
Botany 8 _._ A
Botany 6 c	
Chemistry 9	
Economics 1, Sec. 8	
Economics 4 _	
Education	
English 17	
French 4 a.._ _	
Geology 2   „
German 1 b	
Government 1	
Greek 2	
History 14   	
Latin 2 b, Sec. 2
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Philosophy 2	
Physics 2, Sec. 2	
AplOl
Ap 101
S417
A 100
A 103
Ap 202
A 201
A 104
Apl02
A 203
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 202
A 105,
106, 205,
206, 207,
208
A 204
S200
Botany 5 b  	
Botany 6, b and d   	
Chemistry 3  	
Economics 1, Sec. 1.	
Economics 19..	
Education  	
Ap 101
S417
Economics 1, Sec. 1
Economics 19  ._.
Education 	
S400
A 201
Ap202
English 9   ._	
A 100
French 8 b_ _
French s b 	
Geology 1 	
Geology 7 	
Greek, Begs. .	
A 104
French 4 b  	
A 105
Geology 1 	
Ap 100
10
Greek, Begs. 	
Ap 106
History 20 	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 8, fl, 10,11,
12, 18 	
A 102
A 101
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 8, 9, 10, 11,
12, 18 	
A 106.
108, 203,
Philosophy 1 a. Sec. 2.
Philosophy 8, Sec. 2	
Physics 1, Sec. 2	
205, 200,
Philosophy 1 a. Sec. 2.
Philosophy 8, Sec 2	
Physics 1, Sec. 2	
Physics 3     	
207
A 208
A 108
S200
S210
Agricultural
Ag 104
Ap 100
S300
S417
S400
S 200
Ap202
A 202
A 105,
108, 204,
206
A 208
A 104
Ap 102
A 205
A 201
A 100
A 203
A 101
A 103,
207
A 106
A 102
S210
An 101
Botany 1	
Botany 6 b	
Ap 101
Ap235
S300
S 417
Ap 100,
A 204
A 206
A 104,
105,108,
203
A-100
A 202
Ap 102
A 201
A 106
A 101
A 103,
207
A 102
A 208
A 205
Ap 101
Ap 101
Agricultural
Agl04
Biology 1   __
Chemistry 1, Sec. 3
Chemistry 4	
Biology 1... .....     ....   ..
Ap 100
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2	
Chemistry 7   _
Botany 6 b— 	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2
Chemistry 7	
Economics 1, Sec. 2
Education  	
English 14  	
French 1,
Sees, a, b, c, d	
French 8 c _. _	
French 4 d 	
Geology 8	
German, Beg. A.	
Government 4 _	
History 2	
History 11	
Economics 1, Sec. 4, S
Education	
French l,
Sees, e, f, g, h...
S800
Economics 1, Sec. 2	
Economics 5..  „
S417
S400
Education _   .
S 200
English 14  	
Ap202
11
French 1,
Sees, a, b, c, d 	
French 3 c _.
French 4 d	
French 8 a	
French 4 c    	
Geology 6...	
Government 2   	
History 4    _	
History 12	
Latin 1, Sees. 8, 4
Latin 2 a	
A 202
A 105,
108, 204,
206
A 208
Geolosy 8 .. ..
A 104
German, Beg. A	
Apl02
Government 4	
A 205
History 2 	
A 201
History 11	
A 100
History 15	
Mathematics 2, Sec. 2
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1 .
Zoology 4 „	
Zoology 7	
A 208
Latin 1, Sees. 1,2	
Mathematics 2, Sec. l_
Philosophy 4	
History 15	
Latin 1, Sees. 1, 2   .
Mathematics 2, Sec. 1
Philosophy 4...	
Physics 5	
Zoolosry l     	
A 101
A108, 207
A 106
A 102
S210
Zoology 1 	
AplOl — 1930-31
AND SCIENCE
riculture; Ap, Applied Science;  S, Science.
MORNINGS
Thubsday
Botany 2 	
Commercial Law 1
Economics 2 —
Education	
English  1 b,
Sees. 1, 2, 8, 4, 5, 6, 7
French 2,
Sees, e, f, g, b—
Geology 5 and 12-
German 1 a.	
German 4...
Latin 2 b. Sec. 1-
Latin 9
Mathematics 17-
Physics 2, Sec. 1-
Zoology 2	
Zoology 8	
Botany 8 —
Botany 6 c...
Chemistry 9_
Economlcs 1, Sec 8_
Economics 4 ■.	
Education.	
English 17-
French 4 a._
Geology 2_
German 1 b	
Government 1_
Greek 2_
History 14	
Latin 2 b. Sec. 2	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 2, 8, 4, 5, S, 7
Philosophy 2.
Physics 2, Sec 2...
Room
A 201
S 300
Ap 204
A 100,
106, 205,
206, 207
208, 208
A 101,
104, 105,
204
Ap 102
A 108
A 202
A 108
A 102
AglOl
S200
Ap 101
AplOl
AplOl
Ap 101
S417
A 100
A 108
Ap202
A 201
A 104
AplOS
A 203
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 202
A 105,
106,205,
00, 207,
208
A 204
S200
Friday
Biology 2	
Botany 6 f	
Botany 7 a—
Economics 6.
Education..
English 1 b,
Sees. 8, 9,10,11,
12, 18_	
English 18	
French 2,
Sees, a, b, c, d...
Geology 3 and 4...
Greek 1 _...
Latin 7...
Mathematics 3 	
Mathematics 10	
Mathematics 16	
Philosophy 1 b. Sec. 1
Physics 1, Sec. 1 	
Botany 5 a	
Chemistry 2—	
Economics l. Sec. 1...
Economics 19  _..
Education  	
English 9 	
French 8 b 	
French 4 b.  _.
Geology 7 	
Greek, Begs. _ —
History 20.
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 8, 9,10,11,
12, 18	
Philosophy 1 b, Sec. 2.
Philosophy 8, Sec. 2...
Physics 1, Sec. 2	
Physics S„._ —
Room
AplOl
AplOl
S800
Ap 201
A 103,
106, 203,
205, 206,
207
A 100
A 101,
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
A 102
A 202
A 204
A 208
*,A 201
Ap 100
S 200
AplOl
S800
S400
A 201
Ap202
A 100
A 104
A 105
Ap 106
A 102
A 101
A 106,
108, 208,
205, 208,
207
A 208
A 103
S200
S210
Saturday
Botany 5 b Lab-
Chemistry 9 Lab	
Commercial Law 1	
Economics 2 	
Education.
English 1 b.
Sees. 1, 2, 8, 4, 5, 6, 7
French 2,
Sees, e, f, g, h
Geology 10	
German 1 a	
German 4	
Latin 2 b. Sec.
Latin 5-
Mathematics 17.-
Physics 2, Sec. 1 -
Botany 5 b Lab	
Chemistry 9 Lab.	
Economics 1, Sec. 3...
Economics 4  _..
Education—	
English 17 	
French 4 a  -..
Geology 10	
German 1 b	
Government 1	
Greek 2.
History 14 	
Latin 2 b. Sec 2._ _
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 2, 8, 4, 5, 6, 7...
Philosophy 2__	
Physics 2, Sec 2......
Room
A 201
S800
Ap 204
A 100,
106, 205,
206, 207,
208, 208
A 101,
104, 105,
204
A~i08
A 202
A 108
A 102
AglOl
S200
A 100
A 108
Ap202
A 201
A 104
jfiiia
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 202
A 105,
106, 205,
206, 207,
208
A 204
S200
10
Botany 1	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 8	
Chemistry 4 	
Economics 1, Sec. 4, 5.
Education.	
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, fa-
French 8 a...
French 4 c.
Geology 6..
Government 2-
History 4 	
History 12
Latin 1, Sees. 8, 4.
Latin 2 a
Mathematics 2, Sec 2
Philosophy 8, Sec 1...
Zoology 4	
Zoology 7 _.
Ap 101
S80«
S417
Ap 100,
A 204
A 206
A 104,
105, 108,
203
A 100
A 202
Ap 102
A 201
A 106
A 101
A103, 207
A 102
A 208
A 205
Ap 101
AplOl
Agricultural
Economics .-
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2...
Economics 1, Sec. 2_.
Economics S	
Education 	
English 14. -	
French 1,
Sees, a, b, c, d 	
French 8 c.
French 4 d 	
Geology 8  	
German, Beg. A__	
Government 4	
History 2	
History 11	
History 15 	
Latin 1, Sees. 1, 2	
Mathematics 2, Sec.
Philosophy 4	
Physics 5...	
Zoology 6 	
Zoology 5 -	
Agl04
S800
S 400
S 200
Ap202
A 202
A 105,
108, 204,
206
A 208
A 104
Ap 102
A 205
A 201
A 100
A 203
A 101
A 103
A 106
A 102
S210
Ap 101
Ap 101
Botany 5 b Lab	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 8...
Chemistry 9 Lab	
Economics 1, Sees. 4, 5
Education-	
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, h—
French 3 a  	
French 4 c 	
Geology 10	
Government 2 	
History 4 -.
History 12  	
Latin 1, Sees. 8, 4	
Latin 2 a.  	
Mathematics 2, Sec. 2
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1	
S800
AplOO,
A 204
A 206
A 104,
105, 108,
203
A 100
A 202
aToi
A 106
A 101
A 108
A 102
A 208
A 205
11 AFTERNOONS
TIME TABLE
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
Botany 8 Lab. 	
Botany 5 c Lab .....
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1...
Chemistry 1, Lab.,
Sees, a and b	
Economics 9 	
Education _.
English 2 b.	
S300
French 1,
Sees, i, j, k, 1 	
French 4 e  	
History 10.	
Latin 3 - —
Mathematics l, Sec. 1.
Philosophy 7	
Philosophy 9	
Sociology 2 	
Zoology 5 Lab	
Zoology 6 Lab _.
Botany 8 Lab _
Botany 5 c Lab _
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, a and b	
Chemistry 7 Lab	
Economics 10 _
Education 	
English 10 	
English 16 — 	
French 1, Sec. m	
Geography 1	
German, Beg. c _.
German 2 _ 	
History 1  	
History 13  	
History 19 	
Philosophy 1 c _
Physics 5 Lab „
Sociology 1 	
Zoology 5 Lab _..
Zoology 6 Lab. _
A 208
A 103
A 100,
Ap 100,
S400,
S200
A 104,
105,108,
208
A 204
A 106
A 207
A 206
A 201
A 205
A 101
A 100
A 106
A 206
A 104
A 203
Ap 100
A 205
A 201
A 100
A 108
A 101
S210
A 108
Bacteriology 1 J
Botany 1 Lab. .._
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, a, b. 	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 7 Lab.	
Education -	
English 12	
Geology 5..	
Physics 5 Lab.	
Zoology 5 Lab	
Zoology 6 Lab	
Bacteriology 1.™	
Botany 1 Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, a, b_	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a.
Chemistry 7 Lab	
Geology 5 Lab	
Physics 5 Lab.	
Zoology 5 Lab	
Zoology 6 Lab 	
Bacteriology	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, a, b	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a.
A 108
A 201
Ap 102
S400
Bacteriology 1 _
Botany 2	
Botany 4	
Botany 6 e	
Education	
English 5 	
English 7	
Geology 1 Lab	
Geology 7 Lab	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 8, 4, 5, 6, 7
Philosophy 5	
Physics 8 Lab., Sec. 1...
Zoology 2 Lab	
Zoology 8 Lab	
A 104
A 201
A 101
Apioo
A 105,
106, 203,
205, 206,
207, 208
A 204
Botany 3 Lab. _.
Botany 5 a and c	
Botany 6 c Lab	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1	
Economics 9 	
Education	
English 2 a	
French 1,
Sees, i, j, k, 1	
French 4 e	
Geology 7 Lab	
History 10	
Latin 8	
Mathematics 1, Sec. 1
Philosophy 7	
Philosophy 9	
Sociology 2	
Zoology 5 Lab.	
Zoology 6 Lab	
Bacteriology 1	
Biology 1, Sec. 1.
Botany 2 ...
Botany 4	
Botany 6 e	
Education
English 1 b,
Sees 7, 8, 9, 10,11,
12, 18 „..
English 2 c	
Geology 1 Lab	
Geology 7 Lab	
Mathematics 4	
Physics 8 Lab., Sec. 1.
Zoology 2 Lab.	
Zoology 8 Lab	
Ap 202
A 108,
105,108,
205, 206,
207, 208
A 100
Ap 106
A 106
Biology 1, Sec. 1	
Botany 2 Lab...	
Botany 4 Lab	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b....
Education	
English 15	
Geology 6 Lab..	
Greek, Begs   	
Physics 8 Lab. Sec. 1
Zoology 2 Lab	
Zoology 3 Lab	
Biology 1, Sec. 2	
Botany 2 Lab	
Botany 4 Lab.	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b	
Geology 6 Lab	
Zoology 2 Lab	
Zoology 8 Lab -.
Education...
A 103
A 101
A 102
Biology 1 Lab. 2	
Botany 2 Lab 	
Botany 4 Lab	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b	
Botany 8 Lab	
Botany 5 a and c
"*otany 6 c Lab	
Economics 10	
Education	
English 10	
English 16	
French 1, Sec. m.
Geology 7 Lab	
Geography l _,
German, Beg. c	
German 2	
History 1	
History 13 „	
History 19	
Philosophy 1 c	
Sociology 1	
Zoology 5 Lab.	
Zoology 6 Lab.	
S 800
A 208
A 103
A 100
A 104,
105, 108,
208
A 204
AplOO
A 106
A 207
A 206
A 201
A 205
A 101
A 100
A 106
A 206
A 104
A 208
AP106
AplOO
A 205
A 201
A 100
A 108
A 101
S210
A 108
A 108 -Continued
AFTERNOONS
Thursday
Biology 1, Sec. 8...
Botany 4...
Botany 6 c and e Lab.
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec. c _	
Education _
English 8 _.
English 7	
Geology 1 Lab.	
Geology 9 	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 8, 9, 10, 11,
12,18	
Philosophy 5
Physics 8 Lab., Sec. 2.
Zoology 1 Lab	
Biology 1, Sec. 8	
Botany 4	
Botany 6 c and e Lab.
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec.c	
Chemistry 8 Lab. b......
Education	
English 1 a,
Sees. 1, 2, 8, 4, 5, 6...
Geology 1 Lab	
Geology 9 	
Mathematics 4	
Physics 8 Lab., Sec 2.
Zoology 1 Lab.	
Biology 1, Sec. 4	
Botany 7 Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec. c...
Chemistry 2 Lab. b.
Chemistry 8 Lab. b...
Education	
English 15.
Physics 8 Lab., Sec.
Zoology 1 Lab	
Room
A 104
A 201
A 101
Ap 112
A 108,
106, 203,
205, 206,
207
A 204
Ap 202
A 100,
108, 205,
206, 207,
208
A 106
A 108
A 101
Friday
Biology 1, Sec. 5	
Biology 8	
Botany 6 d Lab.	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, d, e	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1	
Chemistry 8 Lab. a.	
Economics 9	
Education	
English 2 a	
French 1,
Sees, i, j, k, 1	
French 4 e	
Geology 2 Lab.	
History 10	
Latins	
Mathematics 1, Sec. 1
Philosophy 7	
Philosophy 9	
Sociology 2	
Zoology 4 Lab	
Zoology 7 Lab.	
Bacteriology 1	
Biology 1, Sec. 5	
Biology 3	
Botany 6 d Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, d, e	
Chemistry 8 Lab. a......
Economics 10	
Education	
English 10	
English 16	
French 1, Sec. m	
Geography l	
Geology 2 Lab	
Geology 8	
German, Beg. c	
German 2	
History 1	
History 13	
History 19	
Philosophy 1 c	
Sociology 1	
Zoology 4 Lab	
Zoology 7 Lab	
Bacteriology 1 _	
Biology 1, Sec. 6	
•Biology 3	
Botany 6 d Lab.	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, d, e	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 8 Lab. a	
Education	
English 12	
Zoology 4 Lab	
Zoology 7 Lab.	
Biology 1, Sec. 6	
Biology 8	
Botany 6 d Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, d, e    	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a	
Chemistry 8 Lab. a	
Zoology 4 Lab.	
Zoology 7 Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, d, e	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a	
Room
S800
A 208
A 103
A 100
A 104,
105, 108
203
A 204
A 106
A 207
A 206
A 201
A 205
A 101
A 100
A 106
A 206
A 104
A 203
Ap 100
A 205
A 201
A 100
A 108
A 101
S210
A 108
A 103
A 201
Biology 1, Sec. 4	
Botany 7 Lab	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b...
Chemistry 8 Lab. b.
Zoology 1 Lab	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b.. Faculty of Arts and Science Supplemental Examinations
SEPTEMBER, 1930
-5
o
Date
Wednesday,
September 10th
Thursday,
September llth
Friday,
September 12th
Saturday,
September 13th
Monday,
September 15th
Tuesday,
September 16th
Wednesday,
September 17th
Hour
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
First Year
History 1, 2, 3	
English Literature...
Latin Authors _
Chemistry 1	
Latin Composition...
French	
Geometry.	
Greek	
Physics 1, 2
Trigonometry...
Algebra	
English Composition..
German   	
Biology 1....	
Economics 1.
Geography	
Second Year
History 1, 2, 3	
English Literature...
Latin 2 	
Chemistry 1, 2..
French...
Geometry-
Greek _	
Physics 1, 2, 3
Logic	
Botany	
Calculus	
Zoology 1	
Algebra 	
Psychology	
English Composition.
Biology l..._ —	
German _ 	
Economics 1, 2	
Geography _. 	
Third Year
s3
&
g
01
Z
o
cc FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE
The degrees offered in this Faculty are Bachelor of Arts
(B.A.), Bachelor of Commerce (B.Com.), and Master of Arts
(M.A.)
Courses which do not lead to degrees are offered in Teacher
Training and Social Service.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.
The degree of B.A. is granted with Honours or as a Pass
degree. A Pass degree will be granted on completion of courses
amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with Calendar
regulations. No distinction is made between Pass and Honour
students in the First and Second Years, except as regards prerequisites for later work, but in the Third and Fourth Years
there are special requirements for Honour students.
Students holding the degree of B.Com. from this University
may proceed to the degree of B.A. in one year by completing 15
additional units of work open to students in their Third and
Fourth years, provided that their additional units are chosen
so as to complete the requirements for the B.A. degree.
It is also possible to obtain the B.A. and B.Com. degrees
concurrently in five years on completion of 75 units chosen so as
to cover the requirements for both degrees.
Double courses are offered in Arts and Science and Applied
Science leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc, or B.A. and
BA.Sc. (in Nursing).
Credit will not be given for more than 15 units in the
First or Second Year of the Winter Session; nor for more than
18 units in the Third or Fourth Year. (See regulations under
"First and Second Tears" and "Third and Fourth Years.")
Credits obtained at the Summer Session (see University
Summer Session) may be combined with Winter Session credits
to complete the 60 units required for the degree of B.A.; but
not more than 30 units of credit may be obtained in the two 72 Faculty of Arts and Science
academic years subsequent to Junior Matriculation nor more
than 15 in the academic year subsequent to Senior Matriculation.
The degree of B.A. will not be granted within three years
from Senior Matriculation nor within four years from Junior
Matriculation.
The maximum credit for Summer Session work in any one
Calendar year is 6 units; and the maximum credit for work
other than that of the regular Summer and Winter Sessions is
3 units per academic year, and 15 units in all subsequent to
Senior Matriculation or First Year Arts.
No credit will be granted for work done at other universities
in the same academic year in which work has been attempted
at this University, whether in the Summer Session or in the
Winter Session or otherwise. Extra-mural work done at other
universities prior to registration at this University may be
accepted, if approved by the Faculty, but may not exceed 3
units in respect of any one academic year or 15 units in all
subsequent to Senior Matriculation. If a student is granted
credit for extra-mural work taken elsewhere the number of units
which he may take at this University without attendance at a
Winter or Summer Session will be correspondingly reduced.
Candidates for the degree of B.A. are advised to attend at
least one Winter Session, preferably that of the Fourth Year.
A student seeking the degree of B.A. without attending a Winter
Session in his Fourth Year will be required to write, in addition
to the examinations in each course, one paper in each of the two
departments in which his major work has been done. This paper
will be on the whole of the student's work in the department
during his Third and Fourth Years.
Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally
consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory period
of not less than two or more than three hours) per week
throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent
laboratory periods) throughout a single term.
Note :—Students in any of the affiliated Theological Colleges
who file with the Registrar a written statement expressing their First and Second Years 73
intention of graduating in Theology will be allowed to offer,
in each year of their Arts course, in place of optional subjects
set down in the Calendar for the Year and course in which
they are registered, Religious Knowledge options, to the extent
of three units taken from the following list: Hebrew, Biblical
Literature, New Testament Greek, Church History, Christian
Ethics and Apologetics.
FIRST AND SECOND YEARS
1. The requirements of the first two years consist of 30
units, 15 of which must be taken in each year. Courses must
be chosen in conformity with the requirements that follow.
Details of courses are given under the various departments.
Each student must take: Units
(a) English 1 in the First Year and
English 2 in the Second Year     6
*(b) The first two courses in a language
offered for Matriculation, one course
in  each  year     6
(c) Mathematics 1, in the First Year....    3
(d) Economics 1, or History 1 or 2 or 4,
or Philosophy 1 (a) and (b) or Philosophy 1  (c)        3
(e) Biology 1, or Chemistry 1, or Geology
1, or Physics 1, or Physics 2      3
(/) Three courses—not already chosen—
selected from the following:—
Biology 1, Botany 1, Chemistry 1,
Chemistry 2, Economics 1, Economics 2, French 1, French 2, Geography 1, Geography 5, Geology 1,
Geology 2, f Beginners' German,
German 1, German 2, t Beginners'
Greek, Greek 1, Greek 2, History 1,
•See Regulation "2."
tSee Regulations "3" and "4.
"A. " 74 Faculty op Arts and Science
History 2, History 4, Latin 1, Latin
2 (a), Latin 2 (b), Mathematics 2,
Mathematics 3, Mathematics 4, Philosophy 1 (a) and (b), Philosophy 1
(c), Physics 1 or Physics 2, Physics
3, Zoology 1     9
Note.—Botany 1, Zoology 1, Geology 1 and
2, Geography 5, History 4 and Philosophy 1 (c) are not open to First
Year students. Economics 1, and
Philosophy 1 are open to First
Year students only if the permission
of the Heads of these departments is
obtained. History 2 is open to
First Year students only if they
are preparing for entrance to the
Normal School. Geology 1, normally
a Third Year subject, may be taken
in the Second Year and must be so
taken by students intending to take
the Honour course in Geology.
2. Students, who have not matriculated in Greek or German,
may take the Beginners' Course in one of these languages to
meet the Junior Matriculation requirements (without University credit) and follow it up with Greek 1 and Greek 2 or
German 1 and German 2 to satisfy the language requirements
under 1 (b).
3. No student in his First Year may elect more than one
beginners' course in language, and no beginners' course in
language will count towards a degree unless followed by a second
year's work in that language.
4. Except in the case of beginners' courses, no course in
language may be taken by a student who has not offered that
language at Matriculation. A beginners' course in language
may not be taken for credit by a student who has obtained
credit for that language at Matriculation. Pass Courses 75
5. A student taking three languages in the first two years
may defer the course selected under 1 (e) to the Third or Fourth
Year, and a student taking four science courses may defer the
course selected under 1 (d) to the Third or Fourth Year.
Note:—Students thinking of entering Applied Science are
referred to the list of subjects required to be taken by them in
First Year Arts, and the regulations in reference to these, given
under "Admission" and "General Outline of Courses" in
Applied Science. They are advised to attend the noon hour
talks on the choice of a profession and on the life and work in
vocations likely to appeal to Applied Science graduates.
To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised to submit
to the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31st of each year,
a scheme of the courses they propose to take during their last,
two years.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years consist
of 30 units, of which students must take, in their Third Year,
not less than 15 units. The graduation standing is determined
by the results of the Third and Fourth Years combined.
PASS CURRICULUM
1. A minimum of 15 units must be taken in two Major
subjects, not less than 6 units in either, and a minimum of 6
units in some other subject or subjects of the Third and Fourth
Years. Work in the First or Second Year is required in each
of the Major subjects, except in the case of Bacteriology. Both
Major subjects must be chosen from one of the following groups:
(a) Chemistry,  Bacteriology,   Botany,   Geology,   Mathematics, Physics, Zoology.
(b) English,  Government,  Greek, Latin, French,  German,
History, Economics,  Mathematics, Philosophy. 76 Faculty op Arts and Science
2. Details of courses available in the Third and Fourth
Years are given under the various departments.
3. Only two subjects (6 units) of the First or Second Year
courses may be taken in the combined Third and Fourth Years.
In a number of these courses extra reading will be required of
Third and Fourth Year students.
When two First or Second Year subjects are taken in the
Third and Fourth Years not more than one of these subjects
may be outside the departments in which the student is doing
his major work.
4. No credit will be given for a language course normally
taken in the First Year unless it is taken in the Third Year and
continued in the Fourth Year. Some courses, however, are
intended for Honour students only.
5. During the Fourth Year one course of private reading,
to count not more than 3 units, may be taken with the consent
of the department concerned. A student will, for the purpose of
this rule, be deemed to be in his Fourth Year if he has completed his First and Second Years and 15 units in Third and
Fourth Year courses. Credit for a course of private reading is
part of the maximum of 15 units which may be taken in addition
to the regular work of Winter and Summer Sessions and no
other additional work may be taken in the same academic year.
HONOURS
1. Students whose proposed scheme of work involves Honour
courses must obtain the consent of the departments concerned
and of the Dean before entering on these courses; and this consent will normally be granted only to those students who have a
clear academic record at the end of their Second Year with at
least Second Class standing in the subject or subjects of specialization. (Cards of application for admission to Honour courses
may be obtained at the Registrar's office.)
2. Certain departments offer Honour courses either alone
or in combination with other departments.   For Honours in a Hoistour Courses 77
single department, at least 18 of the requisite 30 units must be
taken in the department concerned, and at least 6 outside it. For
Honours in combined courses, at least 12 units are required in
each of two subjects. Particulars of these courses are given below.
3. All candidates for Honours may, at the option of the
department or departments concerned, be required to present a
graduating essay embodying the results of some investigation
that they have made independently. Credit for the graduating
essay will be not less than 3 or more than 6 units.
4. Candidates for Honours are required, at the end of their
Fourth Year, to take a general examination, oral or written, or
both, as the department or departments concerned shall decide.
This examination is designed to test the student's knowledge of
his chosen subject or subjects as a whole and is in addition to
the ordinary class examinations of the Third and Fourth Years.
5. Honours are of two grades—First Class and Second Class.
Students who, in the opinion of the department concerned, have
not attained a sufficiently high ranking may be awarded a pass
degree. If a combined Honour course is taken, First Class
Honours will be given only if both the departments concerned
agree; and an Honour degree will be withheld if either department refuses a sufficiently high ranking.
6. The following Honour courses are regularly offered, and
other Honour courses may be arranged with the department
or departments concerned.
HONOUR COURSES IN SINGLE DEPARTMENTS
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Chemistry 1, and Botany 1.
Physics 1 or 2, and Zoology 1 are required before completion of
the course and should be taken as early as possible. Students
are advised to take Chemistry 2 and 3.
Required Courses:—Botany 3, 4, 5 (a), and 6 (c).
Optional Courses:—Biology 2 and 3; courses in Botany not
specifically required; and courses in Zoology. Optional courses
should be selected in consultation with the department. 78 Faculty op Arts and Science
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, Chemistry 1.
Physics 1 or 2 and Botany 1 are required before completion
of the course and should be taken as early as possible. Students
are advised to take Chemistry 2 and 3.
Required Courses:—Zoology 2, 3, 5, 6.
Optional Courses:—Zoology 4, 7, 8; courses in Botany;
Geology 6. These optional courses should be selected in consultation with the Head of the department.
Chemistry
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Mathematics 2.
Course:—Candidates are required to complete the following
courses: Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 and 10.
Classics
Course:—Any three of Greek 3, 5, 6, 7, and any three of
Latin 3, 4, 5, 6.
As proof of ability to write Greek and Latin prose, candidates must attain not less than Second Class standing in Greek
8 and Latin 8. During the candidate's Fourth Year, papers will
be set on sight translation; and the candidate is advised to
pursue a course of private reading under the supervision of the
department.
There will also be a general paper on Antiquities, Literature
and History.
Economics
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—Economics 2 if not already taken, any 15 further
units in the department, to include Economics 4, Economics 9,
and Statistics 1, and two from the following group:
Economics 3, Economics 5, Economics 6, Economics 7,
Economics 11, Statistics 2, Government 1, Sociology 1, also a Honour Courses 79
graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination, and if required,
address a general audience on a designated subject.
Work in this department should be supplemented by a
course in Ethics and by the foundational courses in History.
Economics and Political Science
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—Economics 2 if not already taken, any 15 further
units in the department to include Government 1, Statistics 1,
and three from the following group:
Sociology 1, Sociology 2, Government 2, Government 3, Government 4, Economics 3, Economics 4, Economics 5, Economics
6, Economics 7, Economics 9, Statistics 2.
Also a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial
instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination and, if required,
address a general audience on a designated subject.
Work in this department should be supplemented by a
course in Ethics and by the foundational courses in History.
English Language and Literature
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—English 19 (involving an examination on the life,
times, and complete works of some major English author), 20,
21 (a), 21 (6), 22, 24 (the seminar, which must be attended in
both years, though credit will be given only for the work of the
final year), and a graduating essay which will count 3 units.
Candidates will be required to take a final Honours examination, written or oral, or both, on the History of English
Literature.    In the award of Honours special importance will
be attached to the graduating essay and to the final Honours
examination.
If the candidate's work outside the department does not
include a course in English History, he must take an examination in that subject. 80 Faculty op Arts and Science
Geology
Prerequisites: GeologyJL. If pos^5h3_Geology_2_should be
taken. Chemistry 1 and Physics 1 or 2 should be taken in the
First Year. Zoology 1, to which Biology 1 is prerequisite, should
be taken in the Third Year in preparation for Geology 6.
Course:—18 units to be chosen from Geology 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 10, 12.
History
Course:—Any 18 units, of which the graduating essay will
count 3 units. The seminar (which carries no credit) must be
attended in the Third and the Fourth Years. A reading
knowledge of French is required.
French
Course .-—French 3 (a), 3 (b), 3 (c) in the Third Year.
French 4 (a), 4 (6), 4 (c) in the Fourth Year.
A graduating essay (in French) which will count 3 units.
Mathematics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2.
Course:—Any 18 units in Mathematics, and Physics 3 and
5.   Mathematics 3 or 4, but not both, may be taken among the
requisite 18 units.   A final Honours examination is required.
Physics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2, Chemistry 1.
Course:—Mathematics 10, 16, 17. Physics 3 and 5, and 15
additional units. Students are advised to take Chemistry 4 and
7, if possible.
COMBINED HONOUR COURSES
(a) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Bacteriology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Biology 1; Botany 1,
or Zoology 1.
Course:—Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5; the required courses for
either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour
course in Biology. Honour Courses 81
(b) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Geology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Biology 1; Geology 1.
Course:—Geology 2, 3 and 6; the required courses for either
the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course
in Biology.
(c) Chemistry and Biology (Botany and Zoology)
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2; Biology 1.
Course:—Chemistry 3, 4, 5, 7 and 9; the required courses for
either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour
course in Biology.
(d) Chemistry and Physics
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Mathematics 2.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and Physics 3, 5, 8 or
19, and two units from 7, 10, 12, 13 or 14. Candidates are
advised to take Mathematics 10.
(e) Chemistry and Geology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Geology 1.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and at least 12 units
in Geology.
(f) Chemistry and Mathematics
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2; Mathematics 2.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and at least 12 units in
Mathematics, including Mathematics 10.
(g) Mathematics and Physics
Prerequisites—Mathematics 2; Physics 1 or 2.
Course:—Mathematics, at least 12 units, including Mathematics 10, 16 and 17.
Physics, at least 12 units, including Physics 3 if not already
taken, and Physics 5.
(h) Any Two of:
Economics or Economics and Political Science, English,
French, History, Latin, Philosophy. 82 Faculty op Arts and Science
Economics or Economics) and Political Science
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course in Economics:—12 units, including Economics 4,
Economics 9, Statistics 1, and Economics 2, if not already taken.
Course in Economics and Political Science:—12 units, including Government 1, Statistics 1 and Economics 2, if not already
taken.
English
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—English 20 and 24, and any three of the English
courses of the first division. The seminar must be attended
during both of the final years, but credits which count for the
B.A. degree will be given only for the work of the Fourth Year,
A final Honours examination, written or oral, or both, is
required on the History of English Literature since 1500.
French
Course:—If the graduating essay is written on a French
subject, 3 (a) and 3 (c), 4 (a) and 4 (c); otherwise either
these courses or 3 (a) and 3 (b), 4 (a) and 4 (b).
Courses 3 (b) and 4 (6) are intended primarily for Honour
students and should be taken whenever possible, even if they
are not required to make up the minimum number of units.
History
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French.
Course:—History 10 and any 9 additional units, of which
the graduating essay, if written in History, will count 3 units.
The seminar  (which carries no credits)  must be attended
in the Third and Fourth Years.
Latin
Course:—Latin 8 and any four of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. In the final
year candidates must pass an examination (a) in sight translation, and (b) in Latin Literature, History and Antiquities.
Private reading under the direction of the department is
recommended. Courses Leading to the Degree op B.Com. 83
Philosophy
Course:—Any 12 units besides Philosophy 1, six units in
each year.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.COM.
The degree of B.Com. will be granted on completion of
courses amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with Calendar regulations.
Students holding the degree of B.A. from this University
may proceed to the degree of B.Com. in one year by completing
15 additional units of work, provided that the additional units
are chosen so as to complete the requirements for the B.Com.
degree.
It is also possible to obtain the B.A. and B.Com. degrees
concurrently in five years on completion of 75 units chosen so as
to cover the requirements for both degrees.
The regulations as to Summer Session credits, number of
units to be taken in any academic year, etc., apply to courses
leading to the degree of B.Com. in the same way as to courses
leading to the degree of B.A.
During the summer vacations students are advised to obtain
as much business experience as possible.
First Year
The following courses comprising 15 units are required:
English 1.
The first course in a language offered for matriculation
(Latin or French or German or Greek).
Mathematics 1.
Economics 1.
One course selected from the following: Biology 1, Chemistry
1, Physics 1, or Physics 2.
Second Year
The following courses comprising 15 units are required:
English 2. 84 Faculty of Arts and Science
A continuation course in the language taken in the First
Year.
Mathematics 3.
Economics 2.
Geography 5.
A clear academic record at the end of the Second Year will
be required of students proceeding to the Third Year,
To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised to submit
to the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31 of each year,
a scheme of the courses they propose to take during their last
two years.
Third and Fourth Years
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years comprise
30 units, of which students must take, in their Third Year, not
less than 15 units. The graduation standing is determined by
the results of the Third and Fourth Years combined. Courses
must be chosen in conformity with the requirements that follow.
Each student must take
(a) An additional course in Latin, French or German
(to be taken in the Third Year), or an additional
course in English 3 units.
(b) The following seven courses:
Economics 4.    (Money and Banking)
Economics 6.    (Foreign Trade)
Economics 7.  (Corporation Finance)
Commercial Law 1.
Accountancy 1.
Statistics 1.
Accountancy 2 or Accountancy 3. 21 units.
(c) One of the following courses:
Economies 19.    (Marketing)
Statistics 2.
Economics 11.    (Transportation) 3 units. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 85
(d) Mathematics 3, if not already chosen, otherwise one
course—not already chosen—selected from the following :
Accountancy 2 or Accountancy 3.
Statistics 2.
Economics 11 (Transportation).
Government 1.
Government 4.
Economics. 5 (Taxation).
Mathematics 2.
Education (3 units).
English, if not chosen under (a), (3 units).
Additional course in Latin, French or German.
Geology (3 units).
Forestry (3 units).
Mining (3 units).
Agricultural Economics 1.
Biology (3 units). 3 units.
In the Fourth Year satisfactory work must be done in connection with a discussion class of one hour a week.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.
1. Candidates for the M.A. degree must hold the B.A. degree
from this University, or its equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with
his application on or before September 1st an official statement
of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing
gained in the several subjects of his course. The Faculty will
determine the standing of such a student in this University.
The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. This fee must
accompany the application.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records
who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
To spend one year in resident graduate study; or 86 Faculty op Arts and Science
(i) To do two or more years of private work under the
supervision of the University, such work to be
equivalent to one year of graduate study; or
(ii) To do one year of private work under University
supervision and one term of resident graduate study,
the total of such work to be equivalent to one year
of resident graduate study.
4. One major and one minor shall be required. In general
the minor shall be taken outside the Department in which the
student is taking his major, but special permission may be given
by Faculty to take both major and minor in the same department, provided the subjects are different and are under different
professors.
5. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standard-sized
thesis paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular of
"Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.")
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be
made to the Registrar by October 1st.
7. The following requirements apply to all Departments:
Prerequisites: v
Minor:—For a minor, courses regularly offered in the Third
and Fourth years amounting to at least six units
are prerequisite, and at least second class standing
must have been obtained in each of these courses.
For details of requirements, see regulations of the
several departments.
Major:—For a major, courses regularly offered in the Third
and Fourth years amounting to at least eight units
are prerequisite, and at least second class standing
must have been obtained in each of these courses.
For details of requirements, see regulations of the
several departments.
Students who have not fulfilled the requirements outlined
above during their undergraduate course may fulfil the same Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 87
by devoting more than one academic year's study to the M.A.
work.
M.A. Courses:
Minor:—Five or six units of regular Third or Fourth year
work, or equivalents in reading courses. Examinations to be written, or oral, or both at the discretion
of the Department concerned.
At least second class standing is required in the
subjects of the minor.
Major:—Nine or ten units of regular Third or Fourth year
work, or equivalents in reading courses, of which
units three to six shall be counted for the thesis.
All candidates must submit to a general examination on the major field. This examination may be
written, or oral, or both, at the discretion of the
Department concerned.
At least second class standing is required in the
work of the major.
Languages:—No candidate will receive the degree of M.A.
who has not satisfied the Head of the Department with which he
is majoring of his ability to read technical articles either in
French or in German.
Graduate students, who are Assistants, giving not more than
four hours a week of tutorial instruction, are permitted to
qualify for the M.A. degree after one regular winter session of
University attendance, provided they have done, in the Summer
vacation, research work of nature and extent satisfactory to the
Head of the Department concerned. Such students must be
registered as graduate students and must have secured the
approval of the Head of the Department concerned and of the
Faculty before entering upon the research in question. Other
graduate students doing tutorial work shall not be allowed to
come up for final examination in less than two academic years
after registration as M.A. students. Faculty op Arts and Science
The following special requirements are prescribed by different departments:
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and
Zoology.
Major:—Biology 1, Botany 1, and eight additional units,
including Zoology 1.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation
with the Department.
Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete required units.
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and
Zoology.
Major:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, and eight additional units,
including Botany 1.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with
the Department.
Major:—Thesis,  at least five units,  and  other courses to
complete the required number of units.
Economics
Prerequisites :
Minor:—A minimum of fifteen units of work in subjects in
the Department, or an equivalent. The fifteen
units must include Economics 4, Economics 9, and
Statistics 1.
Major:—Honours in Economics; or in Economics in combination with some other subject; or an equivalent. Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 89
Economics and Political Science
Prerequisites:
Minor:—A minimum of fifteen units in the Department (or
an equivalent), including Government 1 and
Statistics 1.
Major:—Honours in Economics and Political Science, or in
Economics, or in Economics in combination with
some other subject; or an equivalent.
M.A. Course:
All candidates for the Master's degree in this Department
must attend the Honour Seminar.
English
Prerequisites:
Minor:—At least nine units of credit for English courses
elective  in  the  Third  and  Fourth  years  of the
undergraduate curriculum.
Major:—At least fifteen units of credit for courses.elective
in the Third and Fourth years.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Six units of credit in advanced courses in English
not already taken.
Major:—(a) Twelve units of credit in advanced courses
not already taken, one of which courses must
be English 21a, or its equivalent, if this has
not been previously offered for credit.
(b) A graduating essay which will count as an
advanced course involving three units of credit.
(c) Oral examinations on the history of English
Literature.
(d) A reading knowledge of either French or German. A student who offers both languages
will be allowed three units of credit towards the
M.A. degree. 90 Faculty op Arts and Science
French
Detailed Study:
(a) O.F.—Aucassin et Nicolette.
(b) XVIth Century—Montaigne, Essais (Hatier). Chefs-
d'oeuvre poetiques du XVIe siecle (Hatier).
Less Detailed:
(c) XVllth Century and after—The evolution of the
French Novel, particularly the novels treated in Le
Breton's Roman au XVIIe siecle, and the chief Romantic
Novels.
(d) XVIIIth Century—Beaumarchais, Barbier de Seville.
Rousseau, La Nouvelle Heloise—Emile. Diderot, Le
Neveu de Rameau. Voltaire, Les Lettres philosophiques.
(e) XlXth Century—Auzas, La Poesie au 19* siecle.
(Oxford). Alfred de Musset, Theatre. (Oxford).
Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac.   (Fasquelle).
(f) A general knowledge of French literary history from
XVIth Century to end of XlXth. This not to be
detailed, but to treat of main movements.
(g) A thesis in French on a subject to be approved by the
Head of the Department.
Note:—It is expected that the candidate will have read
and will be able to discuss three plays of Moliere, three of
Corneille, three of Racine, and something of Boileau, Bossuet,
Chateaubriand, La Fontaine, Lamartine, Victor Hugo, Balzac,
Flaubert, Anatole France.
Some help will be given by lectures, explanations of texts,
and advice in reading, but the Department cannot undertake to
cover the whole or any considerable part of the syllabus.
History
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History
10 to 20 inclusive. Courses Leading to the Degree op MA. 91
Major:—Three courses (nine units) to be chosen from
History 10 to 20 inclusive.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Two courses (6 units) to be chosen from History
10 to 20 inclusive; or the equivalent in reading
courses.
Major:—Two related courses (six units) to be chosen from
History 10 to 20 inclusive, or the equivalent in
Reading Courses, and a thesis embodying original
work to which 3 units of credit are given. All candidates for a major in History who have not already
done so, must attend the Honours Seminar in Historical Method, or submit to an examination on a
parallel Reading Course approved by the Department.
Mathematics
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Mathematics 10 and at least two other Honour
Courses.
Major:—Candidates must have completed the Honour
Course in Mathematics, or its equivalent.
MA.. Course: I
Minor:—Mathematics 16 and an additional three units to
be chosen from the Honour Courses.
Major:—Any four of the graduate courses and a thesis.
Physics
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Physics 3 and 5 and at least two more units of
work regularly offered in the Third or Fourth
Year.
Major:—At least eight units of work regularly offered in
the Third and Fourth Years. 92 Faculty op Arts and Science
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Six units of work in advanced courses in Physics
not already taken.
Major:—(a) At least six units  of work in the graduate
courses,
(b) A thesis.
TEACHER TRAINING COURSE
Candidates qualifying for the "Academic Certificate"
(given by the Provincial Department of Education, Victoria,
on the completion of the Teacher Training Course) take the
courses prescribed on Pages 126 to 128. These courses are open
only to graduates registered in the Teacher Training Course.
1. Registration
Documentary evidence of graduation in Arts or Science from
a recognized university must be submitted to the Registrar by
all candidates other than graduates of the University of British
Columbia. All correspondence in connection with the Teacher
Training Course should be addressed to the Registrar, from
whom registration cards may be procured.
2. Certificates and Standing
At the close of the University session successful candidates
in the Teacher Training Course will be recommended to the
Provincial Department of Education for the Academic Certificate, and to the Faculty of Arts and Science for tha University
Diploma in Education. Successful candidates will be graded
as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over;
Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
All students registered in the Teacher Training Course at
the University are entitled to the privileges accorded to students
in the various faculties, and are also subject to the regulations
of the University regarding discipline and attendance at
lectures. Courses Leading to the Social Service Diploma      93
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher
Training Course, First or Second Class standing in each of
(1) History and Principles of Education and (2) Educational
Psychology is accepted as equivalent to a minor for an M.A.
degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head of the
Department in which the student wishes to take his major.
3. Preparatory Courses in Arts and Science
For the season 1930-31 candidates will not be admitted to
courses in High School Methods unless they shall have obtained,
in the academic courses normally offered in the Third and
Fourth Years in their chosen subjects, at least nine (9) units of
credit in one subject and at least six (6) units of credit in the
other subject. After 1931 the prerequisite in each case will be
nine (9) units. Special eases will be decided on their merits by
the Head of the Department concerned and by the Professor of
Education. (The academic courses referred to above are English, History, Mathematics, etc., and not courses in Education.)
4. A description of the courses offered is given under Department of Education.
COURSES LEADING TO THE SOCIAL SERVICE
DIPLOMA
The Diploma in Social Service will be granted on the completion of courses amounting to 30 units chosen in conformity
with the following outline:
First Year:
Biology 1. 3 units.
Economics 1 or 2. 3 units.
English 1. 3 units.
Social Service 1. 2 units.
Social Service 2. 1 unit.
Social Service 3. 1 unit.
Social Service 4. 1 unit.
Social Service 9. 1 unit. 94 Faculty op Arts and Science
Second Year:
Economics 3. 3 units.
Philosophy 1 (a) Psychology. 2 units.
Philosophy 8, Social Psychology. 3 units.
Sociology 1. 3 units.
Social Service 5. 1 unit.
Social Service 6 or 7. 1 unit.
Social Service 8. 1 unit.
Social Service 10. 1 unit.
A minimum of eight hours' field work each week for four
terms is required. A student must, in addition, spend two
months with an accredited social agency as a full-time worker
under supervision prior to registration for the technical courses
of the second year.
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students,
are held in December and in April. Applications for special
consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be
submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close
of the examination period. In eases where illness is the plea
for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be
presented on the appropriate form which may be obtained from
the Dean's office.
2. The passing mark will be 50 per cent, in each subject,
except in the case of First and Second Year students who during
one session do 15 units of regular work, in which case an aggregate of 50 per cent, will be required and not less than 40 per
cent, in each subject. In Beginners' Greek and Beginners'
German, however, the passing mark is 50 per cent. In any
course which involves both laboratory work and written examinations, students may be debarred from examinations if they
fail to present satisfactory results in laboratory work, and they
will be required to pass in both parts of the course.
3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First
Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80
per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. Examinations and Advancement 95
4. A student who makes 50 per cent, of the total required
for a full year's work (at least 15 units chosen in conformity
with calendar regulations), but who fails in an individual subject will be granted a supplemental examination in that subject
if he has not fallen below 30 per cent, in that subject. If his
mark is below 30 per cent, a supplemental examination will not
be granted. Notice will be sent to all students to whom supplemental examinations have been granted.
A student who makes less than 50 per cent, of the total
required for a full year's work (15 units) will not be allowed a
supplemental examination.
5. A request for the re-reading of an answer paper must
be forwarded to the Registrar WITHIN FOUR WEEKS after
the results of the examinations are announced. Each applicant
must state clearly his reasons for making such a request in view
of the fact that the paper of a candidate who makes less than a
passing mark in a subject is read at least a second time before
results are tabulated and announced. A re-reading of an
examination paper will be granted only with the consent of the
Head of the Department concerned. The fee for re-reading a
paper is $2.00.
6. Supplemental Examinations will be held in September
in respect of Winter Session examinations, and in June or
July in respect of Summer Session examinations. They will not
be granted at any other time except by special permission of the
Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper. Only
under urgent circumstances will the privilege of writing a
Special Examination be granted. Special examinations will be
held during the third week in October and the second week in
January and at these times only. To pass a supplemental examination a candidate must obtain at least 50 per cent.
A candidate with a supplemental examination outstanding
in any subject which is on the Summer Session curriculum may
clear his record by attending the Summer Session course in the
subject and passing the required examinations. 96 Faculty op Arts and Science
Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied
by the necessary fees (See schedule of Fees) must be in the
hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the date set for
the examinations.
7. If a student fails in two supplemental examinations
(whether on the regular date or by way of special examination),
in respect of the same course, no further supplemental examination will be granted to that student in respect of that course.
If the course is a required one the student must repeat the
course; if it is an optional course he may repeat it or take an
alternative.
8. No student may enter a higher year with standing defective in respect of more than 3 units.
No student who has failures or supplemental outstanding in
more than 3 units or who has any failure or supplemental outstanding for more than a year of registered attendance shall be
allowed to register for more than 15 units of work, these units
to include the subject (or subjects) in which he is conditioned or
permissible substitutes.
9. A student may not continue in a later year any subject
in which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from
an earlier year, except in the case of compulsory subjects in
the Second Year.
10. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year
may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects
of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat
his year will be exempt from attending lectures and t passing
examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least
50 per cent. In this case he may take, in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the
following year.
11. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year
may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by
the Senate to withdraw from the University. Bacteriology 97
12. Any student whose academic record, as determined by
the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or
Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the
recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to
discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of
the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the
University as long as any supplementary examinations are outstanding.
13. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a
passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English, and,
in this event, students will be required to pass a special examination in English to be set by the Department of English.
DEPARTMENTS IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
Department of Bacteriology
Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill.
Instructor: Helen M. Mathews.
Assistant: D. C. B. Duff.
Assistant: May H. Christison.
1. General Bacteriology.—A course consisting of lectures,
demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The history of bacteriology, the place of bacteria in nature,
the classification of bacterial forms, methods of culture and
isolation, and various bactericidal substances and conditions will
be studied. The relationship of bacteria to agriculture, household science, and public health will be carefully considered.
Text-book: Buchanan, Agricultural and Industrial Bacteriology, Appleton.
Students proceeding to Bacteriology 2 need procure Jordan
only (see Bacteriology 2).
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1, and Biology 1.
Seven hours a week.   First Term. 2 units.
2. Special Bacteriology.—A course consisting of lectures,
demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The more common pathogenic bacteria will be studied, together with the reactions of the animal body against invasion by 98 Faculty op Arts and Science
these bacteria. The course will include studies in immunity
and the various diagnostic methods in use in public health
laboratories.
Text-book: Jordan, General Bacteriology, Latest Edition,
Saunders.
Prerequisite: Bacteriology 1.
Seven hours a week.   Second Term. 2 units.
3. As in Dairying 3 (under Faculty of Agriculture.)
iy2 units.
4. As in Dairying 5 (under Faculty of Agriculture.)
IV2 units.
5. Advanced Bacteriology. — A reading and laboratory
course, including immunology. Tutorial instruction of one hour
per week; laboratory and demonstration hours to be arranged
with the class.
Text-books: Required, Lutman, Micro-biology, McGraw-Hill,
Latest Edition. For reference, Kolmer, Infection and Immunity; Jordan, General Bacteriology, Latest Edition, Saunders.
Jordan and Falk, Newer Knowledge of Bacteriology and Immunology, University of Chicago Press, Latest Edition.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1 and 2. 3 units.
6. Soil Bacteriology.—A laboratory and lecture course, in
which the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and quantitatively, with special reference to soil fertility.
Text-book: Lohnis and Fred, Text-book of Agricultural
Bacteriology, Latest Edition, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Bacteriology 1.
Five hours a week.   First term. 2 units.
7. As in Dairying 7 (under Faeulty of Agriculture).
3 units. Botany 99
Department of Botany
Professor: A. H. Hutchinson.
Associate Professor: Frank Dickson.
Associate Professor: John Davidson.
Assistant: Jean Davidson.
Assistant: Josephine Hart.
Assistant: L. M. Black.
Assistant: A. E. Hensley.
Assistant: M. R. Ashton.
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to
more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses
closely related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture, Forestry, Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division
of labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
The course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany and
Zoology.
Text-book: Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea & Febiger.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. (a) Principles of Genetics.—The fundamentals of Genetics illustrated by the race histories of certain plants and
animals; the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations;
acquired characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications.
Text-book:  Castle,  Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard Press.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. First
Term. iy2 units.
2. (6) Principles of Genetics.—A continuation of the
studies of genetic principles with suggested applications. A
lecture and laboratory course. The laboratory work will consist
of problems, examination of illustrative material and experiments with Drosophila.
Text-book: Sinnott and Dunn, Principles of Genetics,
McGraw-Hill. 100 Faculty op Arts and Science
Prerequisite: Biology 2 (a).
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. iy2 units.
3. General Physiology.—A study of animal and plant life
processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth Years having
prerequisite Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the Department
should be consulted.
Text-book: Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology, Longmans, Green.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Reference
reading.   Second Term. 3 units.
Botany
1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of
the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized
courses in Botany.
This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany,
except the Evening Course. Partial credit (2 units) toward
Botany 1 may be obtained through the Evening Course.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. Morphology.—A comparative study of plant structures.
The relationship of plant groups. Comparative life-histories.
Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant
structures, from the lower to the higher forms, involving a
progressive differentiation accompanied by an interdependence
of parts.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First
Term. 2 units. Botany 101
3. Plant Physiology.
3 (a) Text-book: V. I. Palladin, Plant Physiology, English
Edition (Translation of 6th Russian Edition), 1918, Blakiston.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work a week. First
Term. 2 units.
3 (6) This course comprises a more advanced study of the
organic constituents of plants and the physiological changes
occuring during plant growth.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week.   First Term.
iy% units.
3 (c) A course dealing with the underlying principles and
latest developments of such subjects as utilization of inorganic
elements, nitrogen relations, plant buffer systems, permeability,
photosynthesis, respiration, enzyme action and growth rates.
This course includes laboratory and greenhouse experiments
designed to train students of the plant sciences in an understanding of the inter-relations of plants and soils.
Two lectures and one laboratory per week.   Second Term.
iy2 units.
4. Histology: A study of the structure and development
of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning,
staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope,
camera lueida; photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-books: Eames and McDaniels, Introduction to Plant
Anatomy, McGraw-Hill. Chamberlain, Methods in Plant Histology, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Seven hours a week.   Second Term. 2 units
5. Systematic Botany.
5 (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of economic
plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine 102   . Faculty op Arts and Science
and industrial arts; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds, and
poisonous plants. Methods of control.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Texts: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, University
of California; Thomson and Sifton, Poisonous Plants and Weed
Seeds, University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First
Term. iy2 units.
5 (b) Dendrology: A study of the forest trees of Canada,
the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of
the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis
on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada,
Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa; Sudworth, Forest Trees of
the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, Washington;
Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew, T. F.
Unwin.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory
or field work a week. 2 units
5 (c) Descriptive Taxonomy: An advanced course dealing
with the collection, preparation and classification of "flowering
plants." Methods of field, herbarium and laboratory work.
Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species.   Systems of classification.   Nomenclature.
Prerequisites: Botany 1 and 5 (a).
Texts: Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany, Wiley
& Sons; Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage,
Toronto.
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. iy2 units.
6 (a) General Plant Pathology: Identification and life
histories of pathogens causing disease of some common economic
plants; means of combating them. Botany 103
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 1 unit.
6 (6) Forest Pathology: Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant
parasites of forests.
Text-book: Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week during one-
half of the Second Term. y2 unit.
6 (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary).—A course similar to
6 (a), but including more details concerning the diseases studied.
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 2 units.
6 (d) Plant Pathology (Advanced).—A course designed for
Honour or Graduate students. Technique; isolation and culture
work; inoculations; details concerning the various stages in the
progress of plant diseases; a detailed study of control measures.
Prerequisite: Botany 6 (a) or 6 (c).
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
6 (e) Mycology.—A course designed to give the student a
general knowledge of the fungi from a taxonomic point of view.
Text-books: Stevens, Plant Disease Fungi, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Credit
will be given for a collection of fungi made during the summer
preceding the course. First Term. 2 units.
• 6 (/) History of Plant Pathology.—A lecture course dealing with the history of the science of Plant Pathology from
ancient times to the present. 104 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text-book: Whetzel, An Outline of the History of Phytopathology, Saunders.
Prerequisite: Botany 6 (a) or 6 (c).
One lecture a week.   Second Term. y2 unit.
7. Plant Ecology.
7. (a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The interrelations
of forest trees and their environment; the biological characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations; types and
regions; physiography.
Reference books: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British
Columbia, Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forests of the World,
McGraw-Hill; Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford University Press. ^k
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
One lecture and one period of field and practical work a
week.   First Term. 1 unit.
Evening and Short Courses in Botany
A Course in General Botany, comprising approximately
fifty lectures, is open to all interested in the study of plant life
of the Province. No entrance examination and no previous
knowledge of the subject is required.
The course is designed to assist teachers, gardeners, foresters,
and other lovers of outdoor life in the Province. As far as
possible, illustrative material will be selected from the flora of
British Columbia.
The classes meet every Tuesday evening during the University session (Sept.-May) from 7.30 to 9.30 p.m. Field or
laboratory work, under direction, is regarded as a regular part
of the course.
No examination is required except in the case of University
students desiring credit for this course. Biology 1 is a prerequisite in the case of students desiring credit for this course,
This course may be substituted for the lecture part of Botany, Chemistry 105
Other students desiring to ascertain their standing in the
class may apply for a written test,
A detailed statement of requirements and of work covered in
this course is issued as a separate circular. Copies may be had
on request.
Department of Chemistry
Professor: R. H. Clark.
Professor of Analytical Chemistry: E. H. Archibald.
Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer.
Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: J. Allen Harris.
Assistant Professor: William Ure. ,
Instructor: John Allardyce.
Assistant: E. G. Hallonquist.
Assistant: F. L. Munro.
Assistant: R. H. Fleming.
Assistant: Frances L. Fowler.
Assistant: H. B. Marshall.   ^^^
Assistant: D. W. Oswald.
1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give a
full exposition of the general principles involved in modern
Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the properties of
the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their
compounds, and the application of Chemistry in technology.
Text-book: Kendall, General Chemistry, Century Co.
Three lectures and three hours laboratory a week.   3 units.
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—A study of the chemical reactions of the common metallic and acid radicals, together with
the theoretical considerations involved in these reactions.
Text: A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
Reference: Miller,  The Elementary  Theory of Qualitative
Analysis, The Century.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week.   First Term.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more
important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis.
Text-book: Cumming & Kay, Quantitative Analysis, Gurney
& Jackson. 106 Faculty of Arts and Science
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 3 units.
Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a).
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of the
compounds of carbon will include the methods of preparation
and a description of the more important groups of compounds
in both the fatty and the aromatic series.
Chemistry 3 will only be given to those students taking
Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2.
Books recommended: Holleman - Walker, Text-book of
Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods
of Organic Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week.   3 units.
4 (a) Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course in
the development of modern theoretical chemistry, including a
study of gases, liquids and solids, solutions, ionization and
electrical conductivity, chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions, thermochemistry and thermodynamics, colloids.
Text-book: Millard, Physical Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-Hill.   .
Reference: Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles, Macmillan.
For laboratory use: Findlay, Practical Physical Chemistry,
Longmans; and Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on Physical
Chemical Principles.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 (except for students majoring in
Physics) and Mathematics 2. Honour students majoring in
Chemistry should take Mathematics 10 concurrently.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
4 (b) This course is the same as Chemistry 4 (a) with the
omission of the laboratory, and is open only to students not
majoring in Chemistry. 2 units. Chemistry 107
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this eourse will
include the detection and separation of the less common metals,
particularly those that are important industrially, together with
the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in
nature.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week.   First Term.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will
include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks,
as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles
on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute
consideration than was possible in the elementary course.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week.  Second Term.
3 units.
6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries which are dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will
be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in
the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be
given by specialists in their respective fields.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation of
Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory of gases,
properties of liquids and solids, elementary thermodynamics and
thermochemistry, properties of solutions, theoretical electrochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions, radioactivity.
Books recommended: Getman, Outlines of Theoretical
Chemistry, Wiley; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan; For Laboratory: Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments
on Physico-Cliemical Principles, Macmillan; Findlay, Practical
Physical Chemistry, Longmans. 108 Faculty of Arts and Science
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week.   3 units.
8. Electrochemistry.—(a) Solutions are studied from the
standpoint of the osmotic and dissociation theories. The laws of
electrolysis, electroplating, electromotive force, primary and
secondary cells are considered in detail.
For reference: LeBlanc, Elements of Electrochemistry,
Macmillan; Creighton-Fink, Theoretical Electrochemistry, Vol.
I, Wiley; Allmand, Applied Electrochemistry, Longmans.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First
Term. iy2 units.
(b) As in Applied Science.
9. Advanced Organic Chemistry.—Important organic reactions will be discussed. The Carbohydrates, Proteins, Enzyme
Action, Terpenes and Alkaloids will be studied in more or less
detail. In the laboratory some complex compounds will be prepared and quantitative determinations of carbon, hydrogen,
nitrogen, sulphur and the halogens made with the view of
identifying organic compounds.
For reference: Cohen, Organic Chemistry, Arnold.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week.   3 units.
10. History of Chemistry.—Particular attention will be paid
to the development of chemical theory.
Reference: Moore, History of Chemistry, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3, and 4.
Two hours a week. Second Term. 1 unit.
11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—Stereochemical theories
will be discussed in greater detail than in Chemistry 9, and
chemical and physico-chemical methods employed in determining
the constitution of organic compounds will be studied. The
electronic conception of valency as applied to organic compounds Chemistry 109
will be considered, and an outline of the work done in Electro-
Organic chemistry will be given.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 7 and 9.
Lectures: 2 units. 2 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—The Chemistry of colloids and the
application of colloidal chemistry to industry.
References: Bogue, Colloidal Behaviour, Vols. I and II,
McGraw-Hill; Freundlich, Colloid Chemistry, Methuen; Reports
on Colloid Chemistry by British Association for Advancement
of Science.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4.
Two hours a week.   First Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
15. Dairy Chemistry.—The chemistry of the carbohydrates,
fats, and proteins will be discussed in outline, and the chemical
processes involved in enzyme action and fermentation will receive
consideration. This course is open only to students in Agriculture.
Text-book: Chamberlain, Agricultural Chemistry, Macmillan.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 3.
One lecture and three hours laboratory a week.   2 units.
17. Chemical Thermodynamics. — Derivation of fundamental equations and application to the gas laws, theory of
solutions, chemical equilibrium, electro-chemistry and capillarity.
Study of the quantum theory and the Nernst heat theorem.
Text-book: Lewis & Randall, Principles of Thermodynamics,
McGraw-Hill. Reference: Sackur, Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 7.
Two lectures a week.  Second Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.) 110 Faculty of Arts and Science
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. — A more detailed
treatment of the chemistry of the metals than is possible in
Chemistry 1, together with the chemistry of the Rare Elements.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 4.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
19. Clinical Laboratory Chemistry.—This course is a general introduction to the chemical problems met with by the
technician in the modern clinical laboratory. The underlying
chemical facts and principles of the various tests in common use
will be considered, with a general discussion of their physiological significances.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory work
a week. 3 units.
20. Methods in Teaching High School Chemistry.—This
course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training
Course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
References: Black and Conant, Practical Chemistry, The
Macmillan Company. Kendall, General Chemistry, The Century Company.
Three lectures a week.  Second Term.
21. Chemical Kinetics.—The applications of statistical
mechanics to chemical problems, such as the rates of thermal
and photo-chemical reactions, and the emission and absorption
of radiation by molecules. The Quantum theory as applied to
molecular processes and band spectra.
Reference: Tolman, Statistical Mechanics with Applications
to Physics and Chemistry.
Two lectures a week.   Second Term. 1 unit
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years) Classics HI
Department of Classics
Professor: Lemuel Robertson.
Professor of Greek: O. J. Todd.
Professor: H. T. Logan.
Assistant Professor: Eivion Owen.
Instructor: Jean M. Auld.
Assistant: Daisy Christie.
Assistant: Nora M. Holroyd.
Assistant: Joyce Jenkins.
Assistant: Olivia D. Mouat.
Greek
Beginners' Greek.—White, First Greek Book, -Chap. I-
LIII, Copp, Clark.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
1. Lectures.—White, First Greek Book, Chap. LIV-
LXXX.    Xenophon, Anabasis I, Marshall,  Clarendon  Press.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece
and Rome, Chap. I-XXXII.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
2. Lectures.—Plato, Apology, Adam, Pitt Press; Aeschylus, Prometheus Bound, Wecklein-Allen, Ginn.
Composition.—Arnold's Greek Prose Composition, ed.
Abbott, Longmans. Selected passages will occasionally be set
for Unseen Translation.
Literature.—Norwood, The Writers of Greece.
Four hours a week.  Mr. Todd, Mr. Logan. 3 units.
3. Lectures.—Thucydides, History, Book VII, Marchant,
Macmillan; Sophocles, Antigone, Jebb and Shuckburgh, Cambridge; Euripides, Heracles, Gray and Hutchinson, Cambridge.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Homer, Iliad (Selections), Monro, Iliad, 2
Vols., Oxford; Demosthenes, Third Olynthiac, First and Third
Philippics, Butcher, Oxford (Vol. I.).
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.) 112 Faculty of Arts and Science
6. Lectures.—Aristophanes, The Birds, Hall and Geldart,
Oxford; Herodotus, History, Bk. VI, Strachan, Macmillan,
(Classical Series); Lysias, Orations (Selections), Hude, Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking Greek
3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
7. Lectures.—Aristotle, Ars Poetica, Bywater, Oxford;
Plato, The Republic (Selections), Burnet, Oxford. (Open only
to those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be
taken in both Third and Fourth Years.
One lecture a week (for Third Year students); individual
conferences.   Mr. Todd,     f 1 unit.
9. Greek History to 14 A.D.—The course will begin with a
brief survey of contributory civilizations of pre-Hellenic times
and will include a study of social and political life in the Greek
world during the period. Knowledge of Greek is not prerequisite.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
10. Greek Literature in English Translation.—A survey of
Greek literary history from Homer to Lucian, with reading and
interpretation of selected works from the most important authors.
Knowledge of Greek is not prerequisite.
Members of the class will provide themselves with the
following books: Aeschylus, translated by Campbell, Oxford;
Sophocles,  translated  by   Campbell,   Oxford;   Euripides,   Two Classics 113
Vols., Everyman; Aristophanes, translated by Frere, Vol. I,
Everyman.
Two hours a week.  Mr. Todd. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
For those who wish to extend the work to 3 units additional
reading will be provided.
Latin
1. Lectures.—Livy, Bk. XXV, Munro, Oxford Press; Ovid,
Elegiac Selections, Smith, Bell.
Composition.—Bradley, Arnold's Latin Prose Composition,
Longmans, to exercise 19.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece
and Rome, Dent, Chap. I to XXXII.      .        ^
Three hours a week. k 3 units.
A fourth hour a week will be devoted to lectures on the
History prescribed. Attendance at these lectures is voluntary
and no formal credit is given.
2 (a) Lectures.—Virgil, Aeneid, Bk. VI, Page, Macmillan;
Cicero, Pro Archia, Nail, Macmillan; Horace, Odes II, Page,
Macmillan.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece
and Rome, Dent, Chap. XXXII-LIV.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2 (b) Lectures.—Cicero, De Amicitia, Shuckburgh, Macmillan's Elementary Classics; Horace, Selected Odes, Wickham,
Clarendon Press.
History.-—History of the Roman Empire, 27 B.C.—180 A.D.
Composition.—Bradley, Arnolds' Latin Prose Composition,
Longmans, to exercise 48.
Three hours a week. 3 units;
2 (a) and 2 (b) are alternate courses; students intending
to read for Honours in the Third and Fourth years are expected, and students intending to offer Latin as a subject in the 114 Faculty of Arts and Science
Education course, are advised to take Latin 2 (b). A fourth hour
a week will be devoted to lectures on the Roman History prescribed. Attendance at these lectures is voluntary and no formal
credit is given.
3. Lectures.—Terence, Phormio, Sloman, Oxford; Virgil,
Bucolics and Georgics, Page, Macmillan.
Literature.—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
4. Lectures.—Horace, Epistles, Wilkins, Macmillan; Cicero,
Selected Letters, Prichard & Bernard, Oxford.
Literature.—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Juvenal, Satires, Duff, Cambridge; Seneca,
Select Letters, Summers, Macmillan. (Open only to those who
have taken or are taking Latin 3 or 4.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
6. Lectures.—Tacitus, Histories I, II, Godley, Macmillan;
Garrod, Oxford Book of Latin Verse (Selections), Oxford.
(Open only to those who have taken or are taking Latin 3 or 4.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
7. Lectures.—Roman History from 133 B.C. to 180 A.D.
Text-books: A Short History of the Roman Republic, Heit-
land, Cambridge; A History of the Roman Empire, Bury,
Murray.
A knowledge of Latin is not a prerequisite for this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.) Economics 115
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be
taken in both Third and Fourth Years.
One lecture a week (for Third Year students); individual
conferences.  Mr. Todd. 1 unit.
9. Methods in High School Latin. Spring term only. This
course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training
Course, and does not carry undergraduate credit. Readings to
be assigned.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Robertson.
10. Virgil, Aeneid, Page, Macmillan.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Robertson. 3 units.
Department of Economics, Sociology and Political Science
Professor:  Theodore H. Boggs.
Professor:  H. F. Angus.
Associate Professor: J. Friend Day.
Associate Professor: C. W. Topping.
Assistant Professor: G. F. Drummond.
Laura Holland, Cert. School of Social Work (Simmons College)
Part-time lecturer  (Social Service Course).
Mary McPhedran, Diploma, Social Service Department (Toronto)
Part-time lecturer (Social Service Course).
Edna Pearce, B.S.  (Knox, Illinois)  Supervisor of Field Work
(Social Service Course).
Economics
1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of
general economic theory, including a survey of the principles of
value, prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs,
monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of
railways and trusts, etc.
Rufener, Principles of Economics, Houghton Mifflin; The
Canada Year Book, 1930.
Economics 1 is the prerequisite for all other courses in the
department, but may be taken concurrently with Economics 2,
or Government 1. This rule may be waived in the case of
students in Nursing who may find it impossible to take both
Economics 1 and Sociology 1.
Three hours a week. 3 units. 116; Faculty op Arts and Science
2. Economic History.—An outline of Economic and Social
conditions in England previous to 1776. A survey of the more
important phases of European Organization from the time of the
Middle Ages, with special reference to the Industrial Revolution,
the Progress of Agriculture, and resultant social conditions.
Toynbee,   The   Industrial  Revolution,  Longmans. Knight,
Barnes and Flugel, Economic History of Europe in Modern
Times, Houghton Mifflin; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Day. 3 units.
3. Labour Problems and Social Reform.—A study of the rise
of the factory system and capitalistic production, and of the
more important phases of trade unionism in England, Canada,
and the United States. A critical analysis of various solutions
of the labour problem attempted and proposed; profit-sharing,
co-operation, arbitration and conciliation, scientific management,
labour legislation and socialism.
Furniss, Labor Problems, Houghton Mifflin. Simkhovitch,
Marxism versus Socialism, Williams & Norgate; and assigned
readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Boggs. 3 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
4. Money and Banking.—The origin and development of
money. Banking principles and operations, laws of coinage,
credit, price movements, foreign exchange. Banking policy in
the leading countries, with particular reference to Canada.
Holdsworth, Money and Banking, Appleton. Edie, Money,
Bank Credit and Prices, Harpers; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Boggs. 3 units.
5. Government Finance.—An outline course dealing with
the principles and methods of taxation, and administration of
public funds. Topics examined include: Growth of taxation
methods; theories of justice in taxation; classification, increase,
economic effects, and control of expenditures; property, business, personal, commodity, and inheritance taxes, with reference
to Canada, Britain and other countries; the single tax; double Economics 117
taxation; shifting, incidence and economic effects of taxation;
flotation, administration, conversion and redemption of government loans.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Drummond. .   3 units.
6. International Trade and Tariff Policy.—A survey of the
theory of international trade and the foreign exchanges; the
balance of trade, foreign investments and other fundamental
factors; the problem of Reparations and of War Debts; the protective tariff and commercial imperialism; the commercial policy
of the leading countries, with considerable attention to Canada.
Griffin, Principles of Foreign Trade, Macmillan. Fraser,
Foreign Trade and World Politics, A. A. Knopf. Taussig,
Selected Readings in International Trade and Tariff Problems,
Ginn; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Boggs. 3 units.
7. Corporation Economics.—Historical development of the
different forms of industrial organization, including the partnership, joint stock company, and the corporation, and the later
developments, such as the pool, trust, combination, and holding
company. Methods of promotion and financing, over-capitalization, stock market activities, the public policy toward corporations, etc.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
8. Provincial and Local Finance.—A brief summary of
fundamental principles of taxation. Sources of revenue, and
tax systems of federal, and provincial and municipal governments, especially of British Columbia. War Finance and its
influences on local finance. Chief problems of provincial and
municipal finance and administration. Separation of sources of
provincial and municipal revenues. Methods of municipal supervision and control.  Government debts.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week. 3 units. 118 Faculty op Arts and Science
9. History of Economic Thought.—A survey of the development of modern Economic Thought, with a study of the influence of Smith, Malthus, Rieardo, Mill and others; the place of
the Deductive and Historical Methods.  Assigned readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
11. Transportation.—
Mr. Day. 3 units.
(Not given in 1930-31.)
12. Statistics 1.—An introductory course to acquaint the
student with statistical principles and practices; to examine the
use of statistics in various types of business and their value in
forecasting business conditions.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
Beginning in 1931 Mathematics 3 will be a prerequisite for
this course. Should it be necessary to limit the number of students during the year 1930-31 proceeding to the B. A. degree
who may take Statistics 1, preference will be given to those who
have taken Mathematics 3.
13. Statistics 2.—More advanced work, following on the experience obtained in statistical method under Statistics 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
Courses Open Only to Candidates for the Degree op B.Com.
14. Accountancy 1.—An introductory course to give a broad
perspective of accounting principles and methods, and to promote an intelligent appreciation of business transactions in
their relation to the balance sheet and income account.
Assigned readings.
Prerequisites:—Economics 2, Geography 5, Mathematics 3.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Day. 3 units.
15. Accountancy 2.—More advanced work in connection
with the accounting and financial problems of corporations, in- Economics 119
eluding liquidations and consolidations, and the miscellaneous
details connected therewith.
Prerequisite:—-Accountancy 1.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Day. 3 units.
16. Accountancy 3.—A study of the principles involved in
cost accounting, including the practical working through a
model set of accounts, and a consideration of the managerial
use of cost records.
Prerequisite:—Accountancy 1.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Day. 3 units.
17. Commercial Law 1.—An outline of the main principles
of the law of contracts; negotiable instruments; bankruptcy
and insolvency; joint stock companies, etc.; the acquisition and
transfer of property, etc.
Three hours a week. J 3 units.
18. Commercial Law 2.—
(Not offered in 1930-31.)
19. Marketing and Problems in Sales Management.—A detailed study of marketing functions, leading up to the analysis
of problems which have to be solved by sales executives.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Day. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31  and alternate years.)
Agricultural Economics
1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics
as applied to Agriculture; historical background, the agricultural problem; and some special topics, such as the agricultural
surplus, production in relation to population growth, the farm
income, and the share of Agriculture in the national income.
Taylor, Agricultural Economics, Macmillan.
References and assigned readings from Gray, Carver,
Nourse, and others.
Three lectures a week.   Mr. Clement. 3 units. 120 Faculty op Arts and Science
2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied to
the individual farm and to Agriculture as a whole. The general
principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products
as compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured goods, the contributions of national Farmer Movements,
co-operative marketing as illustrated by the marketing of wheat,
fruit and milk in Canada.
Brown, Marketing, Harper and Brothers; Mackintosh,
Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada, Ryerson Press,
Toronto; references and assigned readings from Macklin, Hib-
bard, Boyle, Benton, and others.
Three lectures a week.   Mr. Clement. 3 units.
Government ^
1. Constitutional Government.—This course deals with the
nature, origin, and aims of the State; and with the organization
of government in the British Empire, the United States of
America, France, and Germany.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Angus. 3 units.
2. Introduction to the Study of Law.—(a) A rapid survey
of Legal History,   (b)   Outlines of Jurisprudence.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Angus. 3 units.
3. Imperial Problems.—A course on problems of government within the British Empire.
Readings to be assigned.
Government 1 is a prerequisite of this course, but may be
taken concurrently with it.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
4. Problems of the Pacific.—A course on the problems of the
Pacific Area discussed at the Conference of the Institute of
Pacific Relations in 1929, or likely to be discussed at the Con- Economics 121
ference to be held in 1931.   Each problem will be related to
its economic and political background.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Angus. 3 units.
Sociology
1. Principles of Sociology.—An introductory study of early
man and his relation to his environment; of races of men and
their distribution; of the early forms and development of
industrial organization, marriage and the family, arts and
sciences, religious systems, government, classes, rights, etc. A
review also of certain of the social problems of modern society
growing out of destitution, crime, overcrowding, etc. A critical
survey of schemes for betterment.
Lumley, Principles of Sociology, McGraw-Hill.
References: Davis, Barnes, Introduction to Sociology, Readings in Sociology; Case, Outlines of Introductory Sociology;
Dawson, Gettys, Introduction to Sociology; Park and Burgess,
Introduction to the Science of Sociology; Sumner and Keller,
Science of Society.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Topping. 3 units.
2., Social Origins and Development.—The different views
relating to the origin and evolution of human society; the geographic factor and economic methods in their bearing upon
social life; primitive mental attitudes; the development of
ethical, etc, ideas among primitive peoples; primitive institutions, tools, art, and their modern forms; the growth of cardinal
social ideas through the ancient and classical period to the
present time.
References: Baitsell, The Evolution of Man; Osborn, Men of
the Old Stone Age; Wallis, An 'Introduction to Anthropology;
Goldenweiser, Early Civilization; Thomas, A Source Book of
Social Origins; Boas, The Mind of Primitive Man; Lowie, Primitive Society; Wissler, Man and Culture; Ogburn, Social Change;
Breasted, The Conquest of Civilization, A History of Egypt; 122 Faculty op Arts and Science
Jastrow, The Civilization of Babylonia and Assyria; Bogardus,
A History of Social Thought.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Topping. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
3. The Urban Community.—The structural characteristics
of the modern city will be outlined and the sociological significance of the functions performed by its inhabitants discussed.
A factual study will be made of urban personalities, groups, and
cultural patterns. Methods of urban social control will be investigated and solutions for urban problems will be evaluated.
Text: Anderson, Lindeman, Urban Sociology, Knopf, 1928.
References: Bedford, Readings in Urban Sociology; Burgess
(ed.), The Urban Community; Park and Burgess, The City;
Lynd, Middletown; Zorbaugh, Gold Coast and Slum; Shaw,
Urban Delinquency Areas; A Plan for the City of Vancouver.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Topping. 3 units.
(Not given in 1930-31.)
Courses Open Only to Candidates for the Diploma
op Social Service
1. Introduction to Social Service.—An introductory course
in which is presented a general view of the entire field of social
service as illustrated by its present scope and methods.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Topping. 2 units.
2. Social Organization and Case Work Methods.—An introductory course in which the general principles of the social
treatment of unadjusted individuals and disorganized families
are elucidated.
One hour a week.  Miss McPhedran. 1 unit.
3. Child Welfare.—An introductory course in which methods
of caring for dependent, neglected, and delinquent children are
presented and discussed.
One hour a week.  Miss Holland. 1 unit. Economics 123
4. Personal Hygiene.—An introductory course in which
basic facts concerning physiological processes, infection, immunity and the more common diseases, as related to the task of
the social worker, are presented.
One hour a week.  Dr. Hill, Miss Gray, Miss Kerr.   1 unit.
5. Case Work Methods.—Selected case records which present
complex or difficult situations are studied with a view to determining the principles of diagnosis and treatment involved.
One hour a week. Miss McPhedran. 1 unit.
6. Child Welfare Case Studies.—An intensive study of the
records of a child welfare organization will be undertaken.
Field work to supplement the lectures is arranged for in a child
welfare agency.
One hour a week.   Miss Holland. 1 unit.
7. Group Work. — The principles underlying community
organization and group organization are established by a study
of case records and through the working out of projects. Field
work is arranged to supplement the lectures and discussions.
One hour a week. Miss Pearce. 1 unit.
8. Public Health.—Such an understanding of the work of
the chief public and private health agencies will be given as
will encourage intelligent co-operation on the part of the social
worker with these agencies.
One hour a week.  Dr. Hill, Miss Gray, Miss Kerr.     1 unit.
9 and 10. Field Work Seminar.—The problems met by the
students in connection with field work are discussed as well
as certain other selected problems. The object of the seminar
is to unify and integrate the whole course.
One hour a week.   Mr. Topping, Miss Pearce.
1 unit each session. 124 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of Education
Professor: G. M. Weir.
Associate Professor: Jennie Wyman Pilcher.
Associate Professor: W. G. Black.
Special Lecturer: H. T. J. Coleman.
Lecturers in High School Methods:   The following heads of departments:
H. Ashton, L Richardson, R. H. Clark, T. C. Hebb, L. Robertson,
D. C. Harvey, G. G. Sedgewick, also C. H. Scott of the Vancouver
School Staff.
Lecturers in Elementary School Methods: Miss R. E. Bassin, C. H. Scott,
R. Straight, Miss E. J. Trembath.
Lecturer in Junior High School Organization and Administration: H. B.
King.
Undergraduates who intend to register in the Teacher Training Course are advised to take six units in Education for credit
towards the B.A. degree.
1. Introduction to the Study of Education.—This course is
intended to serve as a broad preparation for subsequent graduate courses. The following topics will be studied: General and
specific objectives; the needs of society and of the individual;
educative agencies; various public school systems; courses of
study; the learning process; administration and supervision of
schools; problems of classification and promotion; educational
and vocational guidance; special rural and urban problems;
recent developments in Canada, Europe, and U. S. A.; the
development of a science of education.
Text: Thorndike and Gates, Elementary Principles of Education, Maomillan.
References: Cubberley, Introduction to the Study of Education, Houghton Mifflin; Smith, Principles of Educational
Sociology, Houghton Mifflin; Clapp, Chase, and Merriman, Introduction to Education, Ginn and Co.; Clement, Principles
and Practices of Secondary Education, Century Co.; The British Columbia School Survey; Readings from' Yearbooks and
Educational Journals. 3 units.
2. Elementary Educational Psychology.—An introductory
survey of the field of psychology as applied to education; inherited human characteristics; individual differences; control
of environment; adaptation to environment; types of learning; Education 125
the law involved in certain accepted methods; motivation; intelligent behaviour; habits and their development; transfer of
training; efficiency in learning; adolescence; personality; educational psychology as a science.
Text: Sandiford, Educational Psychology, Longmans Green.
References: Dashiell, Fundamentals of Objective Psych-
°i°(jy> Houghton Mifflin; Pinther, Educational Psychology,
Holt; Brooks, The Psychology of Adolescence, Houghton
Mifflin; Skinner, Gast, and Skinner, Readings in Educational
Psychology, Appleton. 3 units.
3. History and Principles of Education.—The meaning and
philosophic basis of education will be approached through a
study of the great educational reformers and movements from
the classical period to the present, with special reference to
educational development since 1800. #"■ "]L^
The above survey will be followed by a study of modern
educational tendencies in British Columbia, Ontario, England,
the United States, France, and Germany, with more particular
reference to the post-war period. 3 units.
(Not offered in 1930-31.)
Note: Courses in Education for undergraduates in Arts of
the Third and Fourth Years are preparatory to the Teacher
Training Course, and do not exempt candidates from any of the
work prescribed for the latter course.
The following conditions apply to courses in Education:
(a) Not more than six units in Education may be taken for
credit towards the B.A. degree.
(b) An undergraduate with special qualifications may (on
the recommendation of the Faculty) be allowed to
subsitute an advanced course in Education, of similar
content, for one of the courses mentioned above.
(c) Until the work of the First and Second Years has been
completed, courses in Education are not open (for
credit) to undergraduates. 126 Faculty op Arts and Science
Courses Open Only to Students in the
Teacher Training Course.
A. Throughout the University Session.
(1) Educational Psychology:
Texts: Gates, Psychology for Students of Education,
Macmillan; Brooks, Psychology of Adolescence, Houghton
Mufflin.
References: Pillsbury, Education as a Psychologist Sees
It, Macmillan; Thomson, Instinct, Intelligence and Character, Longmaus; Burnham, The Normal Mind, Appleton.
Prerequisite: Philosophy 1, or its equivalent—obligatory
from 1929.
(2) School Administration and Law:
Texts: Sears, Classroom Organization and Control (Revised Edition), Houghton Mifflin. Manual of School Law,
British Columbia. Foster, High School Administration, The
Century Co.
References: Cubberley, Public School Administration,
Houghton Mifflin; Cubberley, The Principal and His School,
Houghton Mifflin; Perry, The Management of a City School,
Macmillan (Revised Edition) ; Davis, Junior High School
Education, World Book Company; Johnson, Administration
and Supervision of the High School, Ginn & Co.; Report
of the School Survey Commission, British Columbia; Fifth
Year Book of the Department of Superintendence; Assigned
readings.
(3) History and Principles of Education:
(a) Educational leaders and movements, with special
reference to the period since 1800.
(b) Educational systems: Canada, with special reference to British Columbia; England; France;
Germany; the United States.
Texts: Cubberley, A Brief History of Education, Houghton Mifflin.  Chapman and Counts, Principles of Education, Education 127
Houghton Mifflin. Reisner, Nationalism and Education Since
1789, Macmillan.
References: Williams and Rice, Principles of Secondary Education, Ginn & Co.; Birchenough, History of
Elementary Education in England and Wales, University
Tutorial Press; Sandiford, Comparative Education, J. M.
Dent; Balfour, Educational Systems of Great Britain and
Ireland, Oxford; Farrington, Public Primary School System
of France, Columbia University; Kandel, The Reform of
Secondary Education in France, Columbia University;
Alexander, The Prussian Elementary Schools, Macmillan;
Kandel, Twenty-five Years of American Education, Macmillan; Cubberley, Readings in the History of Education,
Houghton Mifflin; Frasier and Armentrout, An Introduction to Education (Revised Edition), Scott, Foresman & Co.
(4) Interpretation and Construction of Educational
Tests and Measurements.
Text: Hines, A Guide to Educational Measurements,
Houghton Mifflin.
References: Pintner, Intelligence Testing, Holt; Monroe, DeVoss and Kelly, Educational Measurements, Houghton Mifflin; Williams, Graphic Methods in Education,
Houghton Mifflin; Otis, Statistical Measurement, World
Book Co.; Ruch, Improvement of the Written Examination,
Scott, Foresman & Co.; Rich and Stoddard, Tests and
Measurements in High School Instruction, World Book Co.
The above courses are obligatory for all students.
B. During the First Term.
(1) Psychology of the Elementary School Subjects.
Texts: Reed, Psychology of Elementary School Subjects, Ginn & Co.; Stone, Silent and Oral Reading, Houghton
Mifflin; Cameron, Educational Psychology, The Century
Co.
References: Freeman, Psychology of the Common
Branches,    Houghton     Mifflin;     Stormzand,     Progressive 128 Faculty op Arts and Science
Methods of Teaching, Houghton Mifflin; Charter, Teaching
the Common Branches, Houghton Mifflin; Holley, Modern
Principles and the Elementary Teacher's Technique, Century Co.
Assigned readings from the Year Books and Educational
Journals,
(Obligatory for all students.)
(2) Methods in Elementary School Subjects:
Assigned readings.
(3) Junior High School Organization and Administration:
Assigned readings.
(Candidates will select at least three hours of work a week
from (2) and (3) above.)
C. During the Second Term.
(1) Methods in High School Subjects:
Texts: Judd, Psychology of Secondary Education, Ginn
& Co.; Mueller, Teaching in Secondary Schools, Century Co.
References: Douglass, Modern Methods in High School
Teaching, Houghton Mifflin Co.; Millis, The Teaching of
High School Subjects, Century Co.
Assigned readings.
(2) Methods Courses in the following high school subjects are offered: English, History, Latin, French, Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry. Two courses are obligatory (for
teaching and examination purposes), while one course may
be attended as an auditor.  Nine hours a week.
5. Observation Assignments and Practice Teaching.
(1) First Term: At least forty (40) hours in the elementary schools of the Province. Obligatory for
all students.
(2) Second Term: At least sixty (60) hours in the
high schools of the Province. Obligatory for all
students. English 129
Department of English
Professor: G. G. Sedgewick.
Professor: W. L. MacDonald.
Associate Professor: F. G. C. Wood.
Associate Professor: Thorleif Larsen.
Associate Professor: F. C. Walker.
Associate Professor: Frank H. Wilcox.
Assistant Professor: M. L Bollert.
Assistant Professor: H. C. Lewis.
Instructor: D. E. Calvert.
Assistant: Dorothy Blakey.
Assistant: Stella Lewis.
Assistant: Isobel Harvey.
First Year
1. (a) Literature.—Elementary study of a number of
literary forms to be chosen from the short story, the play, the
novel, the essay, the simpler sorts of poetry.
Texts for 1930-31: A book of short stories to be selected.
Euripides, Bacchae, in Gilbert Murray's paraphrase. Shak-
spere, Julius Caesar, Sheridan, The School for Scandal, Everyman. Ibsen, The Doll's House, Everyman. The Golden Book
of Modern English Poetry, Dent.
Two hours a week,   m
(b) Composition.—Elementary forms and principles of
composition.
Two hours a week. 3 units.
The work in composition consists of (i) themes and class
exercises, and (ii) of written examinations. Students will be
required to make a passing mark in each of these two parts of
the work.
Second Year
2. (a) Literature.—Studies in the history of English
Literature.
Lectures and texts illustrative of the chief authors and
movements from Tottel's Miscellany to Shelley. Nteilson and
Thorndike, A History of English Literature, Macmillan.
Two hours a week. 130 Faculty of Arts and Science
(b) Composition.—Narrative and descriptive themes; the
writing of reports; study of words.
One hour a week. 3 units.
Text: Larsen and Walker, Pronunciation, Oxford.
(c) Literature.—Readings from Nineteenth Century poetry
since 1830.
For this course, which is intended for students especially
interested in the study of Literature, no formal credit is given.
It is a prerequisite for Honours in English.
One hour a week.
Third and Fourth Years
The curriculum in English for students of the Third and
Fourth Years is arranged in three divisions. The first includes a
central body of general courses which will be offered, as far as
possible, every year, and to each of which are assigned 3 units
of credit. In the second division are listed courses carrying 2
units of credit and usually given in alternate years. And the
third consists of courses designed especially for Honours and
Graduate students, and open to others only by special permission.
Division I.
9. Shakspere.—This course may be taken for credit in two
successive years.   In 1930-31, 9 (b) will be given as follows:
i. A  detailed  study  of  the text  of A  Midsummer
Night's Dream, Henry IV, Part I, Othello, Antony
and Cleopatra.
ii. Lectures on Shakspere's development, on his use
of sources, and on his relation to the stage and the
dramatic practice of his time.
Students will provide themselves with annotated editions of
the four plays named above, and with The Facts about Shakespeare, by Neilson and Thorndike, Macmillan.  They are advised
to get the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson, or the Oxford
Shakespeare, ed. Craig.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units. English 131
9. (a)   (Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
10. The Drama to 1642.—The course begins with a study of
the Theban plays of Sophocles and of Aristotle's Theory of
Tragedy. The main subject of the course is Elizabethan Drama:
(1) its beginnings in the Miracle and Morality Plays and in
the Interludes; (2) its development in Shakspere's predecessors—Lyly, Peele, Greene, Kyd, and Marlowe; (3) its culmination in Shakspere; (4) and its decline in Jonson, Beaumont and Fletcher, Middleton, Webster, Massinger, Shirley,
and Ford.
Texts: Lewis Campbell, Sophocles in English V,erse,
World's Classics, Oxford. Everyman and Other Interludes,
Dent. Chief Elizabethan Dramatists, ed. Neilson. Shakespeare,
ed. Craig, Oxford, or the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Larsen. 3 units.
13. The English Novel from Richardson to the Present Time.
—The development of English fiction will be traced from Richardson, Fielding, Smollett, and Sterne through Goldsmith, Mrs.
Radcliffe, Jane Austen, Scott, C. Bronte, Dickens, Thackeray,
and George Eliot to Trollope, Meredith, Stevenson, Hardy, and
a few representative novelists now living.
A fair knowledge of the works of Jane Austen, Scott,
Dickens, Thackeray, and George Eliot is a prerequisite for those
taking this course.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Wood. 3 units.
14. Eighteenth Century Literature.—This course aims to
give a view, as comprehensive as possible, of the main currents
of English thought and literature during the period 1660-1800.
From year to year various periods will be stressed and the work
of various writers emphasized. Generally speaking, the course is
mainly concerned with the work of such men as Dryden, Pope,
Swift, Addison, Steele, Johnson, Goldsmith, Burke and Burns.
Three hours a week.   Mr. MacDonald. 3 units. 132 Faculty of Arts and Science
16. Romantic Poetry, 1780 to 1830.—Studies in the beginnings and progress of Romanticism, based chiefly on the work of
Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Keats, Shelley, Scott.
Texts: The Oxford editions of the first five poets named.
For  reference:   Elton,   A   Survey   of  English   Literature,
1780-1830.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Walker. 3 units.
17. Victorian Poetry.—This course is concerned chiefly with
the work of Tennyson, Browning, and Arnold. A few weeks
at the close of the term will be devoted to a survey of the
development of later poetry down to the work of Hardy.
Texts: Browning, Complete Poetical Works, Cambridge
Edition.   Arnold, Poems, Oxford Edition.   Tennyson, Poems,
Globe Edition. Pierce, Century Readings in the Nineteenth
Century Poets, The Century Co.
For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature,
1830-1880.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Wilcox. 3 units.
19. Contemporary Literature.—Some tendencies of English
Literature of the last generation, in poetry and the essay and
the novel, will be studied in this course.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Lewis. 3 units.
25 (a) Private Reading.—Students who are candidates for
an Honours degree in English may elect a course of private
reading in their Third Year. 3 units.
25 (b) Private Reading.—Students of the Fourth Year
may pursue, with the consent and under the direction of the
Department, a course of private reading. 3 units.
In such courses examinations will be set, but no class instruction will be given.
Division II
5. The Elements of Poetics.—Studies in the criticism and
appreciation of poetry; the poetic frame of mind; the emotional
element in poetry; poetic content and the nature of poetic truth; English 133
poetic form and its varieties; metrics; contemporary developments in poetry; literary criticism, its nature and function; and
an outline of aesthetic theory from Aristotle to Croce.
Winchester. Principles of Literary Criticism.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Larsen. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
6. Narrative  Writing.—A study of narrative composition:
(a) critical reading of a considerable number of modern short
stories and of two or three modern novels; (o) frequent critical
and narrative themes.
Only a limited number of students will be admitted to this
course.
Two hours a week.    Mr. Sedgewick. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31.)
7. Technique of the Drama.—A practical study of dramatic
form and structure based on the analysis of modern plays, with
special reference to the one-act play as an art iorm.Playmaking,
by Wm. Archer, and Representative One-act Plays by British
and Irish Authors, Little, Brown, are the texts used in this
course.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Wood. 2 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
8. English Poetry, exclusive of the Drama, from the death
of Chaucer to 1649.— (1) The Renaissance; (2) the Fifteenth
Century; (3) the Scottish Chaucerians; (4) John Skelton and
the poets of the Transition; (5) the Elizabethan Lyric; (6) the
Sonneteers; (7) Spenser and the Spenserians; (8) the Jacobean
Poets; (9) the Caroline Poets; (10) the Theory of Poetry
throughout the period.
Texts: Ward, The English Poets, Vol. I. Spenser, ed.
Smith and de Selincourt, Oxford.
Two hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 2 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.) 134 Faculty op Arts and Science
11. English Drama since 1600.—A survey of English drama
from the time of Ben Jonson to the present. Later Elizabethan
drama, representative plays of the Restoration, the works of
Goldsmith, Sheridan, and of early Nineteenth Century writers
will be considered. There will follow a study of some dramatists
of recent years, including Wilde, Shaw, Galsworthy, Pinero,
Jones, Stephen Phillips. Barrie, and the Irish School.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Wood. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
12. Narrative Poetry. — Discussion of the types — epic,
ballad, and romance—with readings, in suitable translations or
modern versions where desirable; modern ballads and metrical
romances represented by the work of Scott, Tennyson, Morris,
Masefield and others.
Two hours a week.  Mr. MacDonald. 2 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
15. American Literature.—A survey of the principal writers
of this continent during the Nineteenth Century.
Texts: Broadus, A Book of Canadian Prose and Verse,
Oxford. Foerster, American Prose and Poetry, Houghton
Mifflin.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Wilcox. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31.)
18. Social, literary, religious and scientific movements of
the Victorian period.—Carlyle, Ruskin, Macaulay, Newman,
Darwin, Mill, Arnold, Butler, Stevenson.
Two hours a week.   Mr. MacDonald. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
Division III
20. Chaucer and Middle English. — (a) Middle English
grammar with the reading of representative texts, (b) The
Canterbury Tales. Geology 135
Texts: A Middle English reader. The Oxford Chaucer,
ed. Skeat.   Manly, The Canterbury Tales, Hplt.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
21a. Anglo-Saxon.—Moore & Knott,  The Elements of Old
English, George Wahr.    Bright, Anglo-Saxon Reader, Holt.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Walker. 2 units.
21b. Anglo-Saxon.—Beowulf.
Two hours a week.   Second Term.   Mr. Walker.        1 unit.
22. Studies in Linguistic History.—Origins, growth, and
development of the English language A brief introduction to
Germanic philology; the Indo - European language group;
Grimm's Law; the Anglo-Saxon period; Norman, French, and
Latin influences; study of the gradual evolution of forms, sounds,
and meanings.
Two hours a week.   First Term.  Mr. Walker. 1 unit.
24. Seminar.—In this class advanced students will get practice in some of the simpler methods of criticism and investigation.
The subject for 1930-31 will probably be some problems in literary criticisms.
Two hours a week.     Mr. Larsen. 2 units.
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor: R. W. Brock.
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaentology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams.
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology:  T. C. Phemister.
Lecturer: M. A. Peacock.
Assistant: Norman Freshwater.
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction
to the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in
the lectures and laboratory:
(a) Physical Geology, including weathering, the work of
the wind, ground water, streams, glaciers, the ocean and its 136 Faculty op Arts and Science
work, the structure of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and
igneous intrusions, metamorphism, mountains and plateaus, and
ore-deposits.
Two lectures a week, First Term.  Mr. Schofield.
(b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, including
the study and identification of the most common minerals and
rocks, the interpretation of topographical and geological maps,
and the study of structures by the use of models.
Two hours laboratory a week, First Term.   Mr. Schofield.
(c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and Quaternary eras.
Two lectures a week, Second Term.   Mr. Williams.
(d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, consisting
of the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations, their evolution and migration as illustrated by their
occurrence in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography will
be taken up and illustrated by the study of palaeogeography of
North America.
Two hours laboratory a week, Second Term.  Mr. Williams.
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will
take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the
lectures.
Prerequisite: Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or Chemistry 1 or Physics 1, taken either before or concurrently.
Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Introductory Geology,
Wiley.
Reference books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill,
Rocks, Rock-Weathering and Soils. Coleman and Parks, Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study of Fossils.
Davis, Geographical Essays.  Hugh Miller's works.
Students will be required to make a passing mark in each
of the above subdivisions. 3 units. Geology 137
2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of
Mineralogy.
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive
Mineralogy of 40 of the most common mineral species, with
special reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common
crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a
brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative
Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First Term.
Mr. Phemister. iy2 units.
2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy.—This
course supplements 2 (a) and consists of a more complete survey
of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a
critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special
emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association
and alteration.      f
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 2(a).
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Second
Term.  Mr. Phemister. iy2 units.
3. Historical Geology.—Continental evolution and development of life with special reference to North America.
Text-book: Schuchert, Historical Geology, 2nd Ed., Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three hours a week, First Term.   Mr. Williams.
IV2 units.
4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following
subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage, 138 Faculty of Arts and Science
structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major
units of structure, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special reference to the physiography
of British Columbia.
TexWbook: Leith, Structural Geology, 2nd Ed., Holt.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three hours a week, Second Term.   Mr. Schofield.
IV2 units.
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study
of the earth and the development of the geological sciences.
Mr. Brock.
(6) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology
and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield,
Mr. Brock.
(c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the
continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their
influences upon life.  Mr. Brock.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures and one hour laboratory a week.       3 units.
6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate
fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both
geological and geographical.
Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American Index
Fossils.  Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Williams.
3 units.
7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of
(i) optical mineralogy and (ii) petrography, with an introduction to petrogenesis.
The laboratory work deals with the determination of rocks,
first under the microscope, and then in hand specimen.
Text-books: Harker, Petrology for Students, Cambridge
University Press.   Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopical Geology 139
Determination of Rock-forming Minerals and Rocks, University
of Chicago Press. Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by
Ford, Wiley.
Reference works: Johannsen, Manual of Petrographic
Methods. Rosenbusch, Microscopical Physiography of the Rock-
making Minerals, translated by Iddings. Rosenbusch, Elemente
der Gesteinslehre. Grubenmann, Die Kristallinen Schiefer.
Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods of 2 hours a
week.  Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis,
and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral
deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore
deposits of the British Empire, special stress being placed on
those in Canada.
Text-book: Ries, Economic Geology (6th edition), Wiley.
Reference books: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits (3rd edition),
McGraw-Hill. Emmons, General Economic Geology and Principles of Economic Geology, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course.
Four hours a week. Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield,
Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course dealing
with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means
of the reflecting microscope.
The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding and
polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in micro-
chemical methods of mineral determination.
During the second term each student is assigned a suite
of ores from some mining district for a critical examination and
report.
Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of
the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill. 140 Faculty of Arts and Science
Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany
this course.
Two hours laboratory a week.   Mr. Brock, Mr. Phemister.
1 unit.
10. Field Geology.—The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers of
the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially
practical, and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field. The students
construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of
Vancouver which require the use of the various methods and
instruments employed in field geology.
Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook
for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken,
must be taken concurrently.
Three hours a week. Mr. Schofield. iy2 units.
12. Meteorology and Climatology.—A course covering in a
general way the whole field, with practice in using instruments,
constructing and using weather charts, and weather predicting.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours a week.
Second Term. Mr. Schofield. iy2 units.
14. Crystallography.—This course consists of a systematic
study of the morphology of crystals, with an introduction to
mathematical crystallography.
The practical work deals with the measurement of crystals
and, in the ease of students in chemistry, a certain number of
the crystals measured will be grown in the laboratory.
Students are advised to consult with the instructor before
registering for this course.
Text-book: Tutton, Crystallography and Practical Crystal
Measurement, Macmillan.
Two lectures and six or eight hours laboratory work a week.
Mr. Phemister.
5 or 6 units, dependent on amount of laboratory work. History 141
Geography
1. Principles of Geography.—A general course dealing especially with the effects of the physical features of the earth upon
life, and the ways in which various forms of life respond to
their physical environment. The following topics are studied:
Earth relations; earth features; climate and climatic factors;
oceans; materials of the land and their uses; changes of the
earth's surface; coasts, plains, plateaus, mountains, inland
waters, and their relations to life; human geography.
Text-book: Salisbury, Barrows and Tower, Elements of
Geography, Holt.
Three lectures a week.  Mr. Brock and Mr. Schofield.
3 units.
5. Economic Geography.—A general survey of the principal
resources and industries of the world, with emphasis on those
entering into international trade, leading to a study of the
principles and problems of transportation by sea.
Whitbeck & Finch, Economic Geography; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Day. 3 units.
10. Introduction to Geography.—A brief introduction to the
study of modern Geography, outlining the history and content
of the subject, physical geography and human geography.
For students in Nursing only.
One lecture a week.  Mr. Brock and Mr. Schofield.     1 unit.
Department of History
Professor: D. C. Harvey.
Professor: W. N. Sage.
Associate Professor: F. H. Soward.
Assistant Professor: A. C. Cooke.
Assistant: Gwen Musgrave.
Students who intend to specialize in History are advised to
study one or more modern languages. A reading knowledge
of French, at least, will be required for Honours. 142 Faculty op Arts and Science
First and Second Years
1. Main Currents in Modem History.—Intended primarily
for First Year students and dealing with the following subjects:
The waning of the Middle Ages; Consolidation of Monarchy in
France, Spain, and England; the Peace of Westphalia and the
Emergence of the European States System; the Balance of
Power; Rise of Russia and Prussia; the Revolutionary and
Napoleonic Era; the Industrial Revolution; Growth of Democracy and Nationality; the Eastern Question; Expansion of
Europe; the Awakening of the Far East; Armed Peace (1870-
1914) ; World War; the Russian Revolution; the League of
Nations and Post-war Problems.
Text-books: Higby, History of Europe (1492-1815);
Schapiro, Modern and Contemporary European History, or
Hayes, Political and Social History of Modern Europe, Vol. II,
1815-1924.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units.
2. (a) Outlines of Canadian History.—Discovery, and exploration; geographic and institutional background of French
and English colonies; relations with the Indians in the fur-
trade; conflict and British supremacy; French and British in
Canada; effects of American Revolution; representative institutions; achievement of Responsible Government; Confederation;
Canadian-American relations; Imperial relations; in the stream
of world polities; growth of literature and the arts.
(6) The History of British Columbia.—Early explorations
of Spaniards and Russians; Captains Cook and Vancouver;
Maritime Fur-trade; Mackenzie;, Fraser, Thompson; /North-
West Company in New Caledonia; Hudson's Bay Company in
"Old Oregon"; Colonies of Vancouver Island and British
Columbia; Gold Rush of 1858; work of the Royal Engineers;
Cariboo; Confederation; development of the Province of British
Columbia.
A preliminary essay counting 10 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term:.   Subject: History 143
The Causes of European Expansion or Joseph Howe and Responsible Government or Social Conditions in British North America
in 1837.
Text-books: Lucas, New France; Skelton, The Canadian
Dominion; Borden, Canadian Constitutional Studies; Howay,
British Columbia, the Making of a Province; Sage, Sir James
Douglas and British Columbia; Sage, Outline of British Columbia History.
Reading and reference: Eastman, Church and State in
New France; Brebner, Acadia, New England's Outpost; Abbe
Groulx, La Naissance d'une Race; Chapais, Cours d'histoire;
Egerton, History of Canada; Trotter, Federation of Canada;
Keenleyside, Canada and the United States; Howay and Schole-
field, British Columbia, Vols. I and II; Denton, The Far West
Coast; The Chronicles of Canada; The Makers of Canada;
Canada and Its Provinces.
Three hours a week. Mr. Harvey and Mr. Sage.        3 units.
4. Mediaeval History.—A sketch of Mediaeval History from
the Council of Nicaea to the Fall of Constantinople. The following subjects will be discussed: The triumph of Christianity;
the breakdown of the Western Roman Empire; the Barbarian
Invasions; the earlier monastic movements; Mohammed and
Islam; the rise of the Papacy; the Franks and Charlemagne;
the struggle between Empire and Papacy; the Normans in
Europe; the Crusades; the Mediaeval Towns; the later monastic
movements; the rise of the Universities; Frederick II; the later
Mediaeval Empire; the national kingdoms in France, Spain and
England; the Turks and the Byzantine Empire.
A preliminary essay counting 10 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject:
The Causes of the Downfall of the Western Roman Empire or
Mohammed and Islam.
Text-book: Munro and Sontag, The Middle Ages.
Additional reading: Sellery and Krey, Mediaeval Foundations of Western Civilization; Thorndike, A History of Mediaeval Europe. Oman, The Dark Ages; Tout, Empire and Papacy; 144 Faculty op Arts and Science
Lodge, The Close of the Middle Ages; Bryce, The Holy Roman
Empire.
This course is intended primarily for Second Year students
who hope to specialize in history.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Sage. 3 units.
Third and Fourth Years
History 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14 are intended for Third Year
students; History 15, 19 and 20 for Fourth Year. History 10
must be taken by all candidates for Honours.
All Honours students (whether in History alone or in a
combined course) must take the History Seminars in their
Third and Fourth Years. The Seminar is offered as a training
in intensive work and carries no credits.
If the graduating essay be written in History it will count
as 3 units. ,
10. British History to the Act of Settlement.—The geographic factors; Roman Britain; character and institutions of
the Anglo-Saxons; relations of Church and State; the Norman
Conquest and the Manorial System; royal supremacy under Normans and Angevins; the Great Charter; the evolution of Parliament ; social conditions in the 14th century; the Lancastrian
experiment; the Tudor Monarchy and the middle class; the
National Church; agrarian and commercial development;
struggle between King and Parliament; the Puritan Rebellion;
the Commonwealth; the Revolution Settlement; the beginnings
of party and cabinet government.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Text-book: Trevelyan, A History of England; Davis, England under the Normans and Angevins; Trevelyan, England
under the Stuarts.
Reading and reference: Stubbs, Constitutional History of
England; McKechnie, Magna Charta; Pollard, The Evolution of
Parliament; Attenborough, Laws of the Earliest English Kings;
Prothero, Statutes and Constitutional Documents; Gardiner,
Constitutional Documents of the Puritan Revolution; Robert- History 145
son, Select Statutes, Cases and Documents; Hunt and Poole
(Ed.), The Political History of England; Oman (Ed.), A History of England.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage and Mr. Harvey. 3 units.
11. British Expansion Overseas.—General aspects of the
expansion of Europe; early English discoverers and navigators;
early trading companies; English Settlements in America; the
Old Colonial System; the duel with France in India and North
America; the American Revolution; colonization of Australasia;
Dutch and British in South Africa; British North America;
Responsible Government; Colonial and Imperial Conferences;
India under the Company and Crown; India under the Dyarchy;
Crown Colonies, Chartered Companies; Protectorates, and Mandates; The British Commonwealth of Nations.
Essay subjects will be assigned throughout the session.
Text-books: Muir, A Short History of the British Commonwealth; Robinson, The Development of the British Empire;
Egerton, Origin and Growth of Greater Britain; Scott, A Short
History of Australia; Innes, A Short History of the British in
India.
Reading and reference: Bolton, A History of the Americas;
Osgoode, The American Colonies in the 17th Century, in the
18th Century; Rusden, A History of Australia; Marais, The
Colonization of New Zealand; Theal, History of South Africa;
Lyall, British Dominion in India; Walker, A History of South
Africa; Cambridge History of the British Empire; Williamson,
A Short History of British Expansion.
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
12. History of the United States of America.—This course
begins with a sketch of the American.colonies at the outbreak
of the Revolution and traces the history of the United States
from the commencement of the War of Independence to the
close of the World War.
Text-books: Pease, The United States; Pease and Roberts,
Selected Readings in American History. 146 Faculty of Arts and Science
Reading and reference: Morison, Oxford History of the
United States; Turner, The Frontier in American History;
Lingley, Since the Civil War; Faulkner, American Economic,
History; The American Nation Series; The Chronicles of
America; The Riverside History of the United States; and the
Histories by Rhodes and Channing.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units.
13. The Age of the Renaissance and Reformation.—The
transition from the Mediaeval to the Modern world; the forerunners of the Renaissance, the Renaissance in Italy and
throughout Europe; the Reformation; the Counter-reformation;
the struggle for mastery; the peace of Westphalia.
Essay subjects will be announced throughout the session.
Text-books: Hudson, The Story of the Renaissance; Johnson, Europe in the 16th Century; Clark, The Seventeenth Century; Smith, The Age of the Reformation; Froude, Life and
Letters of Erasmus; McGiffert, Martin Luther.
Reading and reference: Villari, Life and Times of Machia-
velli; Symonds, The Renaissance in Italy; Andre Michel, Histoire de I'Art (iii. iv.) ; Christopher Hare, Life and Letters in
the Italian Renaissance; Smith, Erasmus; Walker, The Reformation; Pijoan, History of Art.
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
14. The Age of Louis XIV; The Revolutionary and Napoleonic Era.—The establishment of absolutism; its strength,
weaknesses, and decline; the converging movements of the 18th
Century; the "philosophers"; the Revolution; Napoleon; the
Congress of Vienna.
Essay subjects will be assigned throughout the session.
Text-books: Wakeman, The Ascendancy of France; Lowell,
The Eve of the French Revolution; Rose, the Revolutionary
and Napoleonic Era; Gottschalk, The Era of the French Revolution; Fisher, Napoleon. History 147
Reading and reference: Young, Travels in France; Rousseau, Social Contract; Burke, Reflexions on the French Revolution; Taine, L'ancien regime; Aulard, The French Revolution;
Bradley, The French Revolution; Mathiez, The French Revolution; Lacour-Gayet, or Rose, or Fournier, Napoleon; Fisher,
Bonapartism.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
15. Europe, 1815-1919.—The political, social and economic
history of the chief countries of continental Europe, with
especial attention to international relations.
An introductory essay counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject:
Geographic Factors in European History of the 19th Century,
or Materialism as a Factor in the Nineteenth Century.
Text-book:  Hazen, Europe Since 1815.
Additional reading required of Honours students: Gooch.
History of Modern Europe, 1878-1919; Fueter, World History,
1815-1920; Moon, Imperialism and World Politics; Knight,
Barnes and Flugel, Economic History of Europe in Modern
Times.
Reading and reference: Cambridge Modern History;
Lavisse et Rambaud, Histoire Generate; Buell, International
Relations; Tilley, Modern France; Rambaud, Histoire de la
Civilisation Francaise; Grant Robertson, Bismarck; Thayer,
Cavour; Gooch, Germany; Makeef, Russia; Toynbee, Turkey;
The Balkans; Wright, The Geographic Basis of European History; Marvin, Century of Hope and the Unity Series; Fay, The
Origins of the World War; Dickinson, The International
Anarchy.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Soward. 3 units.
19. Great Britain Since 1688.—This course aims at an
interpretation of the constitutional, political, economic and
religious development of the British Isles since 1688.
A preliminary essay counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term.    Subject: 148 Faculty of Arts and Science
The War Policy of William Pitt Earl of Chatham, or The
Irish Question in the Eighteenth Century, or The Social Effects
of the Industrial Revolution.
Text-books: Grant Robertson, England Under the Hanoverians; Fay, Great Britain from Adam Smith to the Present Day;
Trevelyan, British History in the Nineteenth Century.
Reading and reference: Cambridge Modern History
(V-XII); Cambridge History of British Foreign Policy; Poole
and Hunt, The Political History of England; Mantoux, The
Industrial Revolution; Williams, Life of Chatham; Guedalla,
Palmerston; Morley, Life of Gladstone; Moneypenny and
Buckle, Life of Disraeli.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Sage. fc 3 units.
20. The Evolution of Canadian Self-government.—A survey of the period from the Peace of Utrecht to the present day.
The following subjects will be dealt with: French and British
Colonial Systems; British experience in Acadia; British policy
after the Treaty of Paris; the Quebec Act; the effect of the
American Revolution; the Constitutional Act; the opening of
the West; the War of 1812; the formation of parties and the
struggle for Reform; Durham's Report; the achievement of
Responsible Government; Confederation and the completion of
the Dominion; the development of Responsible Government and
the growth of nationhood.
Text-books: Martin, Empire and Commonwealth; Kennedy,
The Constitution of Canada; Kennedy, Documents of the Canadian Constitution.
Reading and reference: Egerton and Grant, Canadian
Constitutional Development; Shortt and Doughty, Constitutional Documents, 1759-1791; Doughty and McArthur, Documents, 1791-1818; Oliver, The Canadian North-West; Durham,
Report; New, Lord Durham; Pope, Confederation Documents;
Whelan, The Union of the British Provinces; Confederation
Debates; Chisholm, Speeches and Public Letters of Joseph
Howe; Keith, Responsible Government in the Dominions; Mori-
son, British Supremacy and Canadian Self-government; Toyn- Mathematics 149
bee, The Conduct of British Empire Foreign Relations Since the
Peace Settlement; Corbett and Smith, Canada and World
Politics; Borden, Canada in the Commonwealth; The Chronicles of Canada; The Makers of Canada; Canada and Its Provinces.
Essays will be assigned throughout the Session.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Harvey. 3 units.
21. Methods in High School History.—This course is offered
primarily for students in the Teacher Training Course and does
not carry undergraduate credit.      Mr. Harvey.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week in Spring term only.
Honours Seminars:
(a) .Third Year: Historical Method.   Mr. Soward.
(b) Fourth Year: The Quebec Act and The Constitutional Act.   Mr. Harvey.
Department of Mathematics
Professor: Daniel Buchanan.
Professor: F. S. Nowlan.
Professor: G. E. Robinson.
Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan.
Associate Professor: L. Richardson.
Assistant Professor: B. S. Hartley.
Instructor: F. J. Brand.
Assistant: May L. Barclay.
Assistant: C. Islay Johnston.
Assistant: A. R. Poole.
Assistant: Ralph Hull.
Assistant: M. Jean Fisher.
Assistant: G. D. Morrison.
Courses 2, 3, and 4 are open to students who have completed
Course 1.
Pass Courses
1. (a) Algebra. — An elementary course, including ratio,
proportion, variation, interest and annuities, theory of quadratic
equations, simple series, permutations, combinations, the binomial theorem, logarithms. 150 Faculty of Arts and Science
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra, Chapters I to
XV, Oxford.
Students intending to take Mathematics 2 or to enter
Applied Science should purchase the larger edition of The Intermediate Algebra.
Four hours a week.   First Term.
(b) Analytical Geometry.—Fundamental concepts, loci, the
straight line and circle, and an introduction to the other conies.
Buchanan and Nowlan, Analytical Geometry (Chapters I to V).
Two hours a week.   Second Term.
(c) Trigonometry. — An elementary course involving the
use of logarithms.
Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry, Copp Clark.
Wentworth and Hill, Tables (Ginn).
Two hours a week.    Second Term. 3 units.
2. (a) Analytical Geometry.—A review of the straight line
and circle, and a study of the other conies.
Buchanan and Nowlan, Analytical Geometry.
Two hours a week.    First Term.    Mr. Nowlan.
(6) Algebra.—The binomial theorem, induction, remainder
theorem, Horner's method of approximating roots, exponential
logarithmic and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial
fractions, convergence and divergence.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra (Larger
Edition), Oxford.
Two hours a week.    Second Term.    Mr. Nowlan.
(c) Calculus.—An introductory course in differential and
integral calculus, with various applications.
Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus (Revised Edition),
Ginn.
One hour a week.    Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
3. The Mathematical Theory of Investments.—This course
deals with the exponential law, the power law, curve fitting, "Mathematics 151
the theory of interest, annuities, debentures, valuation of bonds,
sinking funds, depreciation, probability and its application to
life insurance.
Bauer, Mathematics Preparatory to Statistics and Finance,
Macmillan; Hart, Mathematics of Investment (Revised), Heath.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Robinson. 3 units.
4. Descriptive Astronomy.—The object of this course is to
acquaint the student with the various heavenly bodies and their
motions. It is intended primarily for Pass students, and only a
knowledge of elementary mathematics is essential. The subject-
matter treated includes: The shape and motions of the earth,
systems of coordinates, the constellations, planetary motion,
gravitation, tides, time, the stars and nebulae, theories of evolution of the solar system.
Russell-Dugan-Stewart, Astronomy, Ginn.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Buchanan. 2 units.
Students desiring credit for an additional unit in connection with this course may register for Mathenratics 18. They
will be required to write essays on prescribed subjects dealing
with various phases of Astronomy. 1 unit.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
Honour Courses
10. Calculus.—The elementary theory and applications of
the subject.
Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Nowlan. 3 units.
11. Plane and Spherical Trigonometry.—The work in plane
trigonometry will deal with the following: Identities and
trigonometrical equations, the solution of triangles with various
applications, circumscribed, inscribed and escribed circles, De
Moivre's theorem, expansions of sin n$, etc., hyperbolic and
inverse functions. The work in spherical trigonometry will
cover the solution of triangles with various applications to
astronomy and geodesy. 152 Faculty op Arts and Science
Loney,' Plane Trigonometry, Parts I and II.
Dupuis and Matheson, Spherical Trigonometry and Astronomy, Uglow.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Hartley. 2 units.
12. Synthetic Plane and Solid Geometry.—The course in
plane geometry is intended to cover such topics as the principle
of duality, cross ratio geometry, etc. In solid geometry the principal properties of solid figures are studied, as well as the theory
of projection in space, with various applications to the conic
sections.
Durell, Modern Geometry, Macmillan.
Wilson, Solid Geometry and Conic Sections, Macmillan.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Robinson. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
13. Plane and Solid Analytical Geometry. — A general
study of the conies and systems of conies, and elementary work
in three dimensions.
Ford, Brief Course in Analytical Geometry, Holt.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
14. Theory of Equations and Determinants. — A course
covering the main theory and use of these subjects.
Dickson, Elementary Theory of Equations, Wiley.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Nowlan. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
15. Higher Algebra. — Selected topics in higher algebra,
including infinite series, continued fractions, the theory of numbers, probability.
Hall and Knight, Higher Algebra, Macmillan. Chrystal,
Text-book of Algebra. Part II.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.) Mathematics 153
16. Calculus and Differential Equations.—A continuation
of the previous course in calculus, treating partial differentiation, expansions of functions of many variables, singular points,
reduction formulae, successive integration, elliptic integrals,
and Fourier series.
Ordinary and partial differential equations, with various
applications to geometry, mechanics, physics and chemistry.
Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn.
Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
17. Applied Mathematics. — A course dealing with the
applications of mathematics to dynamics of a particle and of a
rigid' body, and to the two body problem in celestial mechanics.
Loney, A Treatise on Dynamics of a Particle and Rigid
Bodies, Cambridge.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Richardson. 3 units.
18. History of Mathematics. — A reading course covering
the historical development of the elementary branches of mathematics from the earliest times to the present.
Ball, History of Mathematics. Cajori, History of Elementary Mathematics; Smith, History of Mathematics.
Mr. Buchanan. 1 unit.
19. Methods in High School Mathematics.
This course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher
Training Course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.    Second Term.    Mr. Richardson.
Graduate Courses
20. Vector Analysis.—Weatherburn, Vector Analysis.
21. Theory of Functions of a Real Variable. — Goursat-
Hedrick, Mathematical Analysis, Vol. I.
22. Theory of Functions of a Complex Variable.—Town-
send, Functions of a Complex Variable. 154 Faculty op Arts and Science
23. Differential Geometry. — Eisenhart, Differential Geometry.
24. Projective Geometry.—Veblen and Young, Projective
Geometry, Vol. I.
25. Celestial Mechanics.—Moulton, An Introduction to
Celestial Mechanics.
26. Advanced Differential Equations. — Moulton, Periodic
Orbits.
27. Theory of Numbers and Algebraic Numbers. — Reid,
Elements of the Theory of Algebraic Numbers.
28. Hyper-complex Numbers. — Dickson, Algebras and
Their Arithmetics.
29. Modern Algebraic Theories. — Dickson, Modem Algebraic Theories.
Department of Modern Languages
Professor: H. Ashton.
Professor: D. O. Evans.
Professor: A. F. B. Clark.
Associate Professor: Isabel Maclnnes.
Assistant Professor: Janet T. Greig.
Instructor: Joyce Hallamore.
Assistant: E. E. Delavault.
Assistant: G. Barry.
Assistant: W. Tipping.
Assistant: Y. Darlington.
Assistant:' D. Dallas.
Assistant: Alice Roys.
With the consent of the Professor in charge of the course,
a student taking a Pass Degree may be admitted to any course
in the Third and Fourth Years in addition to, but not in lieu
of, 3(a) and 4(a). Students from other universities who have
already taken the work of 3(a) or 4(a), may be given special
permission by the Head of the Department to substitute other
courses.
French
1. Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules, Longmans, Toronto.
Victor Hugo,  Prose  et Poesies   (Wilson  Green),  Cambridge. Modern Languages 155
Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1. Dent. Ashton,
A Preface to Moliere, Longmans, Toronto. (Chaps. I to VI and
VIII.)
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth
Year Courses. 3 units.
Prerequisite: Junior matriculation French or its equivalent.
2. La Fontaine, One Hundred Fables, Ginn. Moliere, Les
Femmes Savantes, Didier. Faguet, Ce que disent les livres,
Cambridge. Ashton, A Preface to Moliere, Longmans. (Chaps.
VII, IX to XVI.)
Conversation in French on the above.   Written resumes.
Composition from Kastner and Marks, French Composition,
Pt. 1.
There will be oral tests. 3 units.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth
Year Courses. ^^
Prerequisite: French 1 or its equivalent.
3. (a) The Literature of the Age of Louis XIV.—Lectures
on the history and social conditions of the period, and on the
development of the literature. Careful reading and diseussion
of the following texts: Racine, Andromaque, Didier. Moliere,
Le Misanthrope, Didier; Le Tartuffe, Heath. An Anthology of
Seventeenth Century French Readings, Princeton University
Press.
Conversation and written resumes based on the above.
This course is obligatory for all students taking Third Year
French. French 2 is prerequisite. Students who cannot
write French with some facility are advised not to attempt
3 (a). They will not be admitted to 3 (6), which is intended
for Honours students.
Students who intend to take French throughout the four
years or who wish to teach this subject should also take 3 (c).
3. (b) The Literature of the Eighteenth Century.—Lectures on the history and social conditions of the period, with 156 Faculty of Arts and Science
special emphasis on the philosophe movement, and the beginnings of romanticism. The inter-relations of French and English thought and literature will be touched upon. Careful reading and discussion of the following texts: Selections from Voltaire (Havens), Century Co. Rousseau, Morceaux choisis
(Mornet), Didier. Diderot, Ext raits (Fallex), Delagrave.
Beaumarchais, Le Barbier de Seville, Macmillan. 3 units.
3. (c) Bibliography, French Composition and Translation from English into French. Kastner and Marks, French
Composition, Pt. 2. 3 units.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth
Year Courses.
4. (a) The Romantic Drama.—Lectures on the origins and
history of Romanticism and on the evolution of the drama during the 19th century. Extensive independent reading will be
expected. Musset, Quatre Comedies, Oxford. Hugo, Hernani,
Heath. Alfred de Vigny, Chatterton, Oxford. Rostand, Cyrano
de Bergerac. 3 units.
French 3 (a) is a prerequisite. Students who cannot write
accurate French with facility and understand spoken French
are advised not to attempt 4 (a).
4. (b) Literature and Society in the XVIIth Century.—
Mme. de La Fayette, La Princesse de Cleves, Cambridge; La
Bruyere, Les Caracteres, Cambridge; Mme. de Sevigne, Lettres,
Manchester; Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules, Longmans; Les
Femmes Savantes, Hatier; L'Avare, Hatier; Le Bourgeois
Gentilhomme, Hatier. French 3 (a) and 3 (6) are prerequisite. The requirements for entrance to 4 (6) are accurately
written French and a sufficient mastery of spoken French to
permit conversation on a literary subject.
4. (c) Composition and Oral French. — Book required:
Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 3. 3 units.
Prerequisite: French 3 (c). Modern Languages 157
4. (d) Poetry of the Nineteenth Century. Henning, Representative French Lyrics of the Nineteenth Century, Ginn;
Hugo, Selected Poems, Methuen; Leconte de Lisle, Poemes
barbares, Lemerre.
Independent readings are required in addition to the prescribed texts.
4. (e) The French Novel. A study of the evolution of the
French Novel with special reference to the Nineteenth Century.
Independent readings are required.
5. (a) Methods in High School. — Modern Languages.
Phonetics during First Term (1 hour a week). Methods during
Spring Term. (2 hours a week). Texts for discussion: Hedg-
cock, Practical French Teaching, Pitman; Modern Studies, 1918.
This course is primarily for students in the Teacher Training
course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
5. (b) Old French and XVIth Century. Texts: Aucassin
et Nicolette; Montaigne, Essais; Ronsard, Poesies; Rabelais,
Gargantua.   (For M.A. candidates only.)
Summer Reading
Upon entering the courses for the years stated, the student
must satisfy the instructor that he has read the books mentioned
below. >
Second Year:
1. Bernardin de St. Pierre, Paul et Virginie.
2. Balzac, Eugenie Grandet.
3. Saintine, Picciola; or Vigny, Poesies Choisies.
Third Year:
1. Chateaubriand, Atala.
2. Le Sage, Gil Bias.
3. Vigny, Servitude et grandeur militaires.
4. Banville, Gringoire; or Musset, Poesies Choisies. 158 Faculty of Arts and Science
Fourth Year:
1. Moliere, L'Avare.
2. Moliere, Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme.
3. Moliere, Les Femmes Savantes.
4. Racine, Andromaque.
5. Racine, Les Plaideurs.
6. Musset, Fantasio.
7. Musset, Un Caprice.
The above have all been chosen from the series Les
Classiques pour tous so as to lighten the cost of buying books for
vacation reading. At the present rate of exchange they can be
bought at the University Bookstore for ten or fifteen cents each.
As these books can be carried in the pocket and read at odd
moments no excuse will be accepted for failure to do summer
reading.
German
A. Beginners' Course. Composition, Grammar, Conversation.—Texts: (a) Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anf anger, Heath.
(b) Foster and Wooley, Geschichten und Marchen, Heath.
3 units.
B. Beginners' Course (Scientific) Composition, Grammar,
Conversation.—Texts: (a) Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anf anger,
Heath.    (6) Gore, German Science Reader, Heath. 3 units.
1. Completion and Revision of Zinnecker. Composition
and conversation based on texts read. Von Hillern, Hoher
als die Kirche, Scribner; Diamond and Uhlendorf, Mitten im
Leben, Holt; Bruns, Book of German Lyrics, Heath.
Science Section with alternate reading. 3 units.
Matriculation or Beginners' German is prerequisite for this
course.
2. (a) Whitney and Stroebe, Easy Germcm Composition,
Holt.    Composition and conversation based on texts read.
Heine, Die Harzreise, Allyn and Bacon. Schiller, Wilhelm
Tell, Heath.   Bruns, Book of German Lyrics. 3 units. Philosophy 159
2. (b) A general survey of German literature.
Prerequisite for German 3.    The lectures will be given in
English and will be open to students of other literatures.   One
hour.   No credit.
German 1, or its .equivalent, is prerequisite for 2 (a).
3. (a)  The Classical Period.
Texts: Lessing, Emilia Galotti, Heath. Goethe, Faust I,
Heath.   Schiller, Die Jungfrau von Orleans, Holt.
Composition based on above texts and Whitney and Stroebe,
German Composition, Holt. 3 units.
3. (b) Introduction to Modern Literature.
Texts: Liptzin, From Novalis to Nietzsche, Prentice-Hall;
other assigned reading. Porterfield, Modern German Stories,
Heath. 3 units.
Composition on above texts.
4. (a) Nineteenth Century Drama. 3 units.
4.  (6) Nineteenth Century Fiction. 3 units.
These courses, which include the reading of a number of
slandard works, will be given alternately.
Department of Philosophy
Professor: H. T. J. Coleman.
Professor: James Henderson.
Associate Professor of Psychology and Education:
Jennie Wyman Pilcher.
1. (a) Elementary Psychology.
Text-book:     Warren,   Elements   of   Human   Psychology,
Houghton Mifflin.
References: Woodworth, Psychology, A Study of Mental
Life. Stout, A Manual of Psychology. Tichener, A Text-book
in Psychology; A Beginner's Psychology. James, Psychology
(Briefer Course).    Pillsbury, Essentials of Psychology.
Two hours a week.   Mrs. Pilcher. 2 units. 160 Faculty op Arts and Science
(b) Elementary Logic.
Text-book: Mellone, Introductory Text-book of Logic,
Blackwood (latest edition).
One hour a week.   Mr. Henderson. 1 unit.
1 (c) Introduction to Philosophy. This course is intended
for two classes of students: First, those who contemplate
specializing in Philosophy either as Honours or Pass students
in their Third and Fourth Years; and second, those who wish
a single course which will give in an untechnical way a statement and discussion of fundamental philosophical problems
and thus assist them in their special studies in other departments.
Text: Patrick, Introduction to Philosophy, Houghton
Mifflin.
References: Paulsen, Introduction to Philosophy, Holt.
Bertrand Russell, The Problems of Philosophy, Home University
Library. Perry, The Approach to Philosophy, Scribners. Calkins, Persistent Problems in Philosophy, Macmillan.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
2. Ethics. A
Text-book:   Everett, Moral Values, Holt.
A special study will be made of selected portions of Aristotle's Ethics, Mill's Utilitarianism, and Kant's Metaphysic
of Morals.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
3. History of Greek Philosophy from Tholes to Plato
(inclusive).
Text-books: Bakewell, Source Book in Ancient Philosophy,
Scribners. Burnet, Greek Philosophy (Part I), Macmillan. In
connection with this course a special study will be made of
Plato's Republic, Phaedo> and Philebus.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Henderson. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.) Philosophy 161
4. The History of Philosophy from the Renaissance to the
Present time.
Text-book: Alexander, A Short History of Philosophy,
Macmillan.
References: Rand, Modern Classical Philosophers, and
the various Histories of Philosophy.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Henderson. 3 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
5. The Philosophy of Kant, with special study of the
Critique of Pure Reason.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Henderson. 3 units.
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years.)
6. Philosophic Movements since the time of Kant. Post-
Kantian Idealism, Pragmatism, Modern Realism, Bergson and
others.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Henderson. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
7. Philosophy of Education. A course of lectures and
discussions dealing with educational movements since the beginning of the 19th century, and with the theories of life and of
mind which are implicit in these movements.
Texts: Spencer, Education, Everyman Edition. Dewey,
Democracy and Education, Macmillan.
References: Butler, The Meaning of Education. Moore,
What is Educationf Adams (ed.), The New Teaching. Holmes,
What is and What might be. Articles in Cyclopedia of Education, Macmillan.
Philosophy 1 (a) and (6) or Philosophy 1 (c) is recommended as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
8. Social Psychology.—A study of those particular phases
of mental life and development which are fundamental in social
organization and activity. 162 Faculty op Arts and Science
Texts: McDougall, Social Psychology, The Group Mind,
Methuen, London. Ginsberg, Psychology of Society, Methuen,
London. Collateral reading will be prescribed from the following: Hobhouse, Mind in Evolution, Morals in Evolution. Sutherland, Origin and Growth of the Moral Instinct. Cooley, Human
Nature and the Social Order. Wallas, Human Nature in Politics;
The Great Society. Ross, Social Psychology. Trotter, Instincts
of the Herd in Peace and War. Bernard, Introduction to Social
Psychology.
Philosophy 1 (a), and (b) or Philosophy 1 (c) is recommended as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
9. (1) A Study of the Concept of Intelligence.—Current
theories of the nature and growth of intelligence. Its practical
bearing in modern life. Principles and applications of the
measurement of intelligence. History of the movement. The
nature and causes of mental defects and peculiarities.
References: Spearman. The Nature of Intelligence and the
Principles of Cognition, Macmillan; Woodrow, Brightness and
Dullness in Children, Lippincott; Peterson, Early Conceptions
and Tests of Intelligence, World Book Co.; Gesell, The Mental
Growth of the Pre-School Child, Macmillan; Freeman, Mental
Tests, Houghton Mifflin; Pintner, Intelligence Testing, Holt.
(2) Principles of Experimental Procedure.—Method of
Measurement. Practical training in the methods of individual
and group examinations. Treatment of subnormal, normal and
gifted children.
Text: Terman, Measurement of Intelligence, Houghton
Mifflin.
References: Terman, Stanford Revision of Binet Simon
Scale, Warwick and York; Wells, Mental Tests in Clinical Practice, World Book Co.; Bisch, Clinical Practice, Williams and
Wilkins; Mateer, The Unstable Child, Appleton; Hollingworth,
Gifted Children, Macmillan; Wallin, Clinical and Abnormal
Psychology, Houghton Mifflin; Cyril Burt, The Young Delinquent, Appleton.
Three hours a week.   Mrs. Pilcher. 3 units. Physics 163
Department of Physics
Professor: T. C. Hebb.
Professor: A. E. Hennings.
Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson.
Associate Professor: G. M. Shrura.
Assistant Professor: H. Grayson-Smith.
Assistant: R. D. James.
Assistant: K. R. More.
Assistant: E. O. Anderson.
Primarily for First and Second Year students.
1. Introduction to Physics.—A general study of the principles of mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound and
electricity, both in the lecture room and in the laboratory. The
course has two objects: (1) to give the minimum acquaintance
with physical science requisite for a liberal education to those
whose studies will be mainly literary; (2) to be introductory to
the courses in Chemistry, Engineering and Advanced Physics.
Students must reach the required standard in both theoretical
and practical work. Open only to students who have not
matriculated in Physics.
Text-book: Millikan, Gale and Edwards, A First Course in
Physics for Colleges.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory a week.     3 units.
2. Elementary Physics.—This course consists of a general
course in Physics suitable for those students who have obtained
standing in Junior Matriculation Physics or its equivalent. It
covers mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound, electricity and some of the more recent developments and theories.
Text-book: Stewart, Physics, A text-book for Colleges,
Ginn.
Prerequisite:    High School Physics.
Three lectures and one two-hour laboratory period a week.
3 units.
References:    Watson, A Text-book of Physics, Longmans;
Kaye and Laby, Physical and Chemical Constants, Longmans.
3. Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat.—A study of the
statics and dynamics of both a particle and a rigid body, the 164 Faculty op Arts and Science
laws of gases and vapors, temperature, hygrometry, capillarity,
expansion, and calorimetry.
Text-books: Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics, Heat,
Ginn; Draper, Heat and the Principles of Thermodynamics,
Blackie & Sons.
Prerequisite:    Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week.     3 units.
Primarily for Third Year Students
5. Electricity and Magnetism.—A study of the fundamentals of magnetism and electricity, including alternating currents
and electron physics.
Text-book: Brooks & Poyser, Magnetism and Electricity,
Longmans.
Prerequisites:   Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week.       3 units.
6. Theoretical Mechanics.—A selected course in statics,
dynamics of a particle and of a rigid body.
Text-book:   Smith and Longley, Ginn.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
7. Introduction to Theoretical Physics.—A course of lectures upon selected topics, including elasticity, viscosity, and
hydromechanics.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
8. Physical Optics.—A course of lectures accompanied by
laboratory work, covering optical instruments, interference,
diffraction and polarisation.
Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period a week.
3 units.
References: Schuster and Nicholson, The Theory of
Optics; Houston, Treatise on Light; Mann, Advanced Optics;
Wood, Physical Optics; Prestoli, Theory of Light; Drude,
Theory of Optics; Taylor, College Manual of Optics; Edser,
Light for Students; Robertson, Introduction to Physical Optics. Physics 165
Primarily for Fourth Year Students
10. Elementary Spectroscopy. — An introductory course,
outlining the general characteristics of spectra and their classification.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
References: Baly, Spectroscopy (4 vols.) ; Kayser, Hand-
buch der Spectroscopic; Wood, Physical Optics.
11. Electricity and Magnetism.—In this course, especial
attention is given to the theoretical phases of Electricity and
Magnetism.
Text-book: Starling, Electricity and Magnetism.
Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 5 and Mathematics 10.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
12. Introduction to Atomic Structure.—A course of lectures
dealing with the conduction of electricity through gases, cathode
and positive rays, photo-electricity, X-rays, and radio-activity.
Reference books: Thomson, Conduction of Electricity
Through Gases; Rutherford, Radio-active Substances and Their
Radiations; Millikan, Electron; Hughes, Photo-electricity;
Andrade, Structure of the Atom.
Prerequisites: Courses 3 and 5, and Differential and Integral
Calculus.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
13. Kinetic Theory of Gases.—A course of lectures giving
an exposition of the classical deductions and an outline of recent
experimental advances of the subject.
Text-book: Loeb, Kinetic Theory of Gases.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
14. Thermodynamics.—A course of lectures covering the
fundamental principles of the subject.
Text-book: Birtwistle, The Principles of Thermodynamics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit. 166 Faculty op Arts and Science
18. Experimental Physics.—A laboratory  course  accompanying Physics 10.
Three hours a week. - 1 unit.
19. Advanced Experimental Physics.—In this course the
candidate for Honours is expected to perform one or more classical experiments and to do some special work.
Carefully prepared reports, abstracts, and bibliographies
will constitute an essential part of the course.
Six hours laboratory a week. 2 to 3 units.
With the consent of the head of the department Fourth
Year students may select one or more units from the graduate
courses.
Primarily for Graduate Students
20. Spectroscopy.—A study of the methods of excitation
and observation of spectra, series in arc and spark spectra,
multiplets, Zeeman and Stark effects, and band spectra.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
21. Radiation and Atomic Structure. — A study of the
theories of radiation and miscellaneous related topics selected
from current literature.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
22. Advanced Electricity and Magnetism.—A study of the
Electromagnetic theory and its application, the theories of
metallic conduction, and electrical oscillations.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
23. Vector Analysis.—A course of lectures upon the applications of Vector Analysis to problems in Physics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
24. X-rays and Crystal Structure.—A study of the modern
methods of production and observation of X-rays, the Compton
effect, X-ray analysis, and the structure of crystals.
One lecture a week. 1 unit. Zoology 167
25. The Theory of Sound.—A course of lectures covering
the propagation of sound, and the general phenomena associated
with vibrating systems.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
26. The Theory of Potential.—A general course giving the
applications of the Theory of Potential to Physics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
27. The Theory of Relativity.—An introductory course to
the theory of relativity.
One lecture a week. 1 unit
40. Methods in High School Physics.—This course is offered
primarily for students in the Teacher Training Course and does
not carry undergraduate credit.   Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.   Second Term.
Department of Zoology
Professor: C. McLean Fraser.
Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer.
Instructor: Mildred H. Campbell.
Assistant: Verna Z. Lucas.
Note:—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology.
1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals.
Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups.
Comparative life-histories.
Text-books: Parker and Haswell, Manual of Zoology, Macmillan.    (American Edition.  1916.)
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.—A detailed comparative study of a member of each of the classes of Vertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First
Term. 2 units. 168 Faculty op Arts and Science
3. Comparative Anatomy of Invertebrates. — A detailed
comparative study of a member of each of the main classes of
Invertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 2 unite.
4. Morphology of Insects.—General Entomology.
A collection of insects is required.
Two  lectures  and  four  hours laboratory  a  week.     First
Term. 2 units.
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Entomology.
5. Histology.—Study of the structure and development of
animal tissues.   Methods in histology, j
Ten hours a week.   Second Term. 3 units.
6. Embryology.—A general survey of the principles of
vertebrate embryology. Preparation and examination of em-
bryological sections.
Ten hours a week.   First Term. 3 units.
7. Economic Entomology.—A study of the insect pests of
animals and plants; means of combating them.
Lecture and laboratory work, six hours a week. Second
Term. 2 units.
8. Private Reading. — A course of reading on Biological
theories. In this course examinations will be set, but no class
instruction will be given. 2 units.
9. Advanced Entomology.—A course in (a) Insect Morphology and wing venation, or (b) Internal Anatomy and Histology, or (c) Taxonomy.
Prerequisite: Zoology 4.
Lecture and laboratory work seven hours a week. First
Term. 2 units.
Courses correlated with the work for the major thesis are
given to graduate students. THE
FACULTY
OF
APPLIED SCIENCE ^^.   At FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
FOREWORD
The object of the courses in Applied Science is to train
students in exact and fertile thinking, and to give them a sound
knowledge of natural laws and of the means of utilizing natural
forces and natural products for the benefit of man and the
advancement of civilization. Experience shows that such a
training is the best yet devised for a large and increasing
proportion of the administrative, supervisory and technical
positions.
The object, then, is to turn out, not finished engineers or
industrial leaders—these are the product of years of development in the school of experience,—but young men with a special
capacity and training for attaining these goals, and thus for
helping to develop the industries of the province. Consequently
the undergraduate course is made broad and general rather than
narrow and highly specialized.
Furthermore, such a course is not only better suited to the
British Columbia conditions that the graduate will encounter in
his after-life, but also better for later specialization, for it
furnishes a more solid foundation, a better background, a
broader outlook and a more stimulating atmosphere, all necessary if the specialist is to achieve the maximum results of which
he is capable.
The student is offered a full undergraduate course and an
additional year of graduate study. The preliminary year required in Arts is intended to increase the student's general
knowledge and to broaden his outlook. It is hoped that enough
interest will be aroused to encourage the student to continue
some study of the humanities as a hobby or recreation.
The first two years in Applied Science proper are spent in
a general course that includes Mathematics and all the basic
sciences.   This gives not only a broad training, but enables the 172 Faculty op Applied Science
student to discover the work for which he has special liking or
aptitude and to select more intelligently the subjects in which
to specialize during the two final years. During the latter
periods students acquire more detailed knowledge and get practice in applying scientific knowledge, in solving problems, in
doing things; and there is also training in Economics, Law and
Industrial Management.
During the long period between sessions, the student is required to engage in some industrial or professional work that
will afford practical experience not obtainable in the laboratory
or field classes, but that is a necessary supplement to academic
study.
An engineering degree in the Applied Science Course of the
University is accepted by the Association of Professional Engineers of the Province of British Columbia in lieu of four of
the six years' practical experience required by the Engineering
Act of the Province for registration to practise engineering.
Students are advised to register with the Association of Professional Engineers of British Columbia in their third year;
and to associate themselves with the appropriate engineering
societies.
FACILITIES FOR WORK
For laboratory and other facilities see Pages 25-37.
ADMISSION
The general requirements for admission to the University
are given on Pages 42-44.
As for Arts, complete Junior Matriculation or its equivalent
is required for admission to Applied Science, and no student
may enter with any outstanding supplemental in Junior
Matriculation.
DEGREES
The degrees offered students in this Faculty are:
Bachelor of Applied Science  (B.A.Sc).    (See below.)
Master of Applied Science (M.A.Sc).    (See Page 205.) Courses in Applied Science 173
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.Sc.
The degree of Bachelor of Applied Science is granted on the
completion of the work in one of the coursest given below:
I. Chemical Engineering.
II. Chemistry.
III. Civil Engineering.
IV. Electrical Engineering.
V. Forest Engineering.
VI. Geological Engineering.
VII. Mechanical Engineering.
VIII. Metallurgical Engineering.
IX. Mining Engineering.
X. Nursing and Health.
A double course in Arts and Science and in Applied Science
is offered, leading to the degrees of B.A., and B.A.Sc. (See
Page 203.)
This course is strongly recommended to students who are
young enough to afford the time and to students wishing to
enter Applied Science, and who have to their credit some, but
not all, of the requirements of First Year Applied Science as
set forth on Page 175. The latter can select subjects in their
Second Year Arts that will satisfy the Arts requirements for
the double degree, and at the same time complete the work of
First Year Applied Science. Thus they may qualify for an
Arts degree without expending any more time than would be
required to qualify them for entrance into Second Year Applied
Science.
PRACTICAL WORK  OUTSIDE THE  UNIVERSITY
In order to master professional subjects it is very important
that the work done at the University should be supplemented
by practical experience in related work outside. Therefore
students are expected to spend their summers in employment
that will give such experience.
fThe  curriculum   described  in  the  following  pages   may  be  changed
from time to time as deemed advisable by the  Senate. 174 Faculty op Applied Science
Before a degree will be granted, a candidate is required
to satisfy the Department concerned that he has done at least
four months' practical work related to his chosen profession.
Fourth and Fifth Year Essays (see Page 178) should be based,
as far is possible, upon the summer work.
Upon approval of the Dean and the Head of the Department concerned, University credit may be granted for work
done outside the University under the immediate supervision
of the University staff, during the University session.
Practical work such as Shop-work, Freehand Drawing, Mechanical Drawing, Surveying, etc., done outside the University,
may be accepted in lieu of laboratory or field work (but not
in lieu of lectures) in these subjects, on the recommendation
of the Head of the Department and approval of the Dean.
Students seeking exemption as above must make written application to the Dean accompanied by certificates indicating
the character of the work done and the time devoted to it.
OPENING OF SESSION
Lectures begin on Wednesday, September the 24th, and it
is essential to the success of the student that he should be in
attendance at the opening of the session, for in order to allow
as much time as possible for practical work in the summer,
the length of the session has been reduced to the minimum
consistent with the ground to be covered. Consequently a
student requires the full season to master the work. A mere
pass standing is a very unsatisfactory preparation for subsequent work or professional life. Further, from this standpoint, the opening work is the most important of the whole
session for the student, for in it are given the general instructions necessary for the proper attack upon the work.
The only exception is when summer employment affords
experience necessary for the course the student is specializing
in, which will lighten to some extent the work of the session
(such as in Geological Survey field work for geological students),
and the nature of the work makes it impossible for the student
to  reach  the  University  on  the opening  day.    Under these Courses in Applied Science 175
circumstances, if the student furnishes a statement from his
employer showing it was impossible for him to release the student earlier, the Dean may allow the student to enter without
penalty. The student must, however, register at the opening
of the session in accordance with the regulations in reference
to registration.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS
A student with supplemental must write them off at the
regular time for supplemental examinations before the opening
of the session, for he will need the entire session for the current
year's work. It is also necessary, for a successful year, to have
a satisfactory knowledge of the foundational work of the preceding year. No exceptions to the above rule will be granted
except as under Paragraph 5, Page 174.
GENERAL OUTLINE OF UNIVERSITY COURSES
Students in Nursing and Health register directly in Applied
Science and take the special course outlined on Pages 195-203.
All other students of Applied Science have a general course
common to all for the first three years as under;
FIRST YEAR
The students register in Arts and take the following classes
as Arts students:
English 1 (a and b).
Mathematics 1 (Algebra, Geometry, Trigonometry).
Chemistry 1.
Physics 1 or 2.
Latin 1 or French 1 or German B.
The *passing grade is 50 per cent, for Chemistry, Physics
and each of the Mathematics subjects, but in the others a mark
of 40 per cent, will be accepted, provided an average of 50
per cent, has been obtained in the total work of the year. No
student with any supplemental outstanding will be admitted to
Second Year Applied Science.
•Beginning with the opening of the Session 1931-32 the passing grade
will be 50 per cent, in each subject of examination. 176 Faculty op Applied Science
Biology 1, if taken as an optional extra subject, and passed
with a grade of at least 50 per cent., need not be repeated in
the Second Year. Economics 1, taken in Arts, is accepted in
lieu of Economics in Applied Science.
A reading knowledge of French and German is desirable
for students in Engineering.
Students who have passed First Year Arts and Science,
but who have failed to make the necessary entrance requirements for the Second Year Applied Science, may take the
September Supplemental Examinations of Arts and Science.
First Year students are advised to attend the noon-hour
talks on the choiee of a profession and on the life and work in
various callings likely to be selected by Applied Science graduates, as these may assist the student in determining whether
Applied Science is the best course for him. If he finds it is
not, he can proceed in Arts without any loss of time.
Equivalent standing in the subjects of the First Year outlined above, obtained outside the University, may be accepted
in lieu of this First Year work, but students are strongly advised
to take this year within the University if it is at all possible,
for it is a professional course co-ordinated throughout. It
gives the student a year longer in which to become acquainted
with the work in Applied Science, and hence be in a better
position to choose the particular branch of Applied Science to
follow; the friendships formed with his classmates in Arts are
continued throughout his college life, and tend to offset the
narrowing effect of a somewhat specialized course with associates
confined to students of the same interests and knowledge as
himself; he becomes acquainted with the University methods
and life during the year planned to help him make these
adjustments, and enters the comparatively heavy Second Year
prepared and able to work effectively from the opening of the
term, which is unlikely to be possible for a student just beginning life at the University.
The work of the Second and Third Years is the same in all
courses, except those in Nursing and Health, Courses in Applied Science
177
SECOND YEAR
Subject.
First Term.
ft
« tc 4)
Is
Second Term.
5«
Math. 1  Trigonometry	
Math. 2 Solid Geometry	
Math. 3 Algebra	
Math. 4 Calculus -	
C.E.   1   Descriptive  Geom	
M.E. 1 Drawing 1	
Physics 8 Mechanics	
Physics' 4 Heat	
Chem. 2a Qual. Analysis	
M.E. 2a Shop Practice	
Biology 1* Introductory	
CE. 2 Surveying	
C.E. 30 Engineering Prob. 1
237
237
237
237
216
238
254
254
211
239
208
216
225
Field Work
..141    ...
3
6
"a
3
2
2
* Biology 1, Arts, passed with a grade of at least 50 per cent, will be
accepted in lieu of this course.
THIRD YEAR
Subjects
0 *
First Term.
"H n.
■8&.4S
es ps 4J
Second Term.
tu
ah
Math.  6  Calculus	
Math. 7 Anal. Geom	
Chem. 2b Quan. Analysis	
C.E. 4 Graphics -	
M.E. 6a Elem. Theory	
Physics  5  Electricity	
Physics 6 Mechanics	
CE. 5 Mapping	
C.E. 6 Surveying	
Geology 1 General	
tC.E. 7 Surveying	
C.E. 31 Engineering Prob. 2...
238
238
212
216
240
254
254
216
216
232
217
226
Field   Work
3    I    ....
fStudents entering Civil, Forest, Geological, Metallurgical, and Mining:
Engineering are required to take Civil Engineering 7 (see Page 217).
immediately after the spring examinations. 178 Faculty op Applied Science
FOURTH AND FIFTH YEARS
Essays
Essays are required of all students entering the Fourth
and Fifth Years, and must conform to the following:
1. The essay shall consist of not less than 2,000 words.
2. It must be a technical description of the engineering aspects
of the work on which the student was engaged during the
summer, or of any scientific or engineering work with which
he is familiar. In the preparation of the essay, advantage
may be taken of any source of information, but due
acknowledgment must be made of all authorities consulted.
It should be suitably illustrated by drawings, sketches,
photographs or specimens.
3. It must be typewritten, or clearly written on paper of
substantial quality, standard letter size (8V2XII inches),
on one side of the paper only, leaving a clear margin on
top and left-hand side. Students are recommended to
examine sample reports to be found in the library or in the
departments.
4. All essays must be handed in to the Dean not later than
November 15th.
All essays, when handed in, become the property of the
Department concerned, and are filed for reference. Students
may submit duplicate copies of their essays in competition for
the students' prizes of the Engineering Institute of Canada, or
the Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
Essays will be considered as final Christmas examinations.
A maximum of 100 marks is allowed, the value being based
on presentataion, English and matter. In fourth year essays,
presentation, that is, the manner in which the material is
arranged and presented to the reader, is given most weight,
with English second and matter third. In fifth year essays
most emphasis is placed on matter, but the other two are still
rated highly. Courses in Applied Science
179
COURSES
I.    Chemical Engineering
The course in Chemical Engineering should prepare the
student for the duties of managing engineer in a chemical manufactory. As such he must be conversant not only with the
chemical processes involved, but he must be prepared to design
and to oversee the construction of new buildings and to direct
the installation and use of machinery. In the industrial life
of British Columbia the chemical engineer may be more particularly concerned with the manufacture of acids and alkalies,,
the preparation from natural sources of various organic and
inorganic compounds, the pulp and paper industry, and the
utilization of the waste from a number of industrial plants
indigenous to the Province. Accordingly, the course of study
includes a number of courses in the older branches of engineering along with the maximum of chemical training allowed by
the time at the disposal of the student.
Fourth Year
Subject.
is™
First Term.
?,*
gel
3*
Second Term.
g£8
•§§£
Essay -	
Economics 1 Introductory
Met.  1  Introductory	
Geol. 2(a)  Mineralogy	
Chem. 3 Organic	
Chem.  4  Theoretical	
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis	
E.E. 1  General	
Physics  7  Light	
CE. 12 Hydraulics	
178
226
251
233
212
212
213
243
254
219
2
3
3
9
2
3
3
6
2 180
Faculty op Applied Science
Fifth Year
if
First Term.    (
Second Term.
Subject.
n
ft
SeS
ft
frees
Essay - -	
178
213
214
214
214
214
251
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
12
2
2
2
2
2
2
Chem. 7 Physical	
Chem. 8 Electro	
Chem. 9 Adv. Organic	
3
3
3
Chem.  16 Engineering	
Met. 2 General	
Thesis	
15
f^^AT
II.    Chemistry
The aim of this course is to train the students in the practice
of Chemistry, and to give a thorough knowledge in the fundamental principles of this subject, that they may be prepared
to assist in the solution of problems of value to the industrial
and agricultural life of the Province. The course is arranged
to give in the first two years a knowledge of the fundamental
principles of Chemistry and Physics, with sufficient mathematics
to enable the theoretical parts of the subject to be understood.
In the Fourth Year, Analytical, Organic, and Physical
Chemistry are studied from the scientific side and in relation
to technology; while in the Fifth Year a considerable amount
of time is devoted to a short piece of original work. Courses in Applied Science
181
Fourth Year
Subject.
3§
First Term.
5*
ol ■
JoP
TO
Second Term.
2ES
Essay. -	
Econ. 1 Introductory...
Chem. 3 Organic	
Chem. 4 Theoretical	
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis.
Met. 1  Introductory	
Geol. 2(a) Mineralogy.
Met. 5 Assaying	
German (Arts)  B	
Physics 7 Light	
178
226
212
212
213
251
233
252
158
254
Fifth Year
ii
Oft"
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
"a
Is-
g3 05 a
L.   |H   V
ft
"a
frees
178
97
255
213
214
214
214
251
2
2
2
2
2
2
7
3
3
8
9
2
2
2
2
2
2
Bacteriology 1  (Arts)	
Physics 12 Advanced	
Chem.  6  Industrial	
Chem. 7 Physical	
Chem. 8  Electro-	
Chem. 9 Adv. Organic	
Met. 2 General	
Thesis	
3
3
3
18
III.    Civil Engineering
The broad field covered by Civil Engineering makes it an
adjunct of many other branches of engineering, yet the Civil
Engineer occupies a distinctive field and is intimately associated
with a wide group of undertakings vitally affecting the health,
comfort and prosperity of the commonwealth. 182 Faculty op Applied Science
The various branches of Civil Engineering deal with problems in water supply and water purification; in sewerage systems, sewage disposal plants, and the handling of municipal and
industrial wastes; in hydraulic power development; in irrigation
and drainage for agricultural activities; in all types of structures, bridges and buildings, piers and docks, sea walls and
protective works; in transportation, canals, locks, highways,
electric and steam railways; and in the management and direction of public works, public utilities, industrial and commercial
enterprises.
The course in Civil Engineering is designed to provide,
in so far as time will permit, foundations for continued growth
along those lines which the student's interest and environment
determine, without compelling too early specialization. Training
in pure and applied science, in the humanities, in economics and
engineering law, and in the technical phases of professional
work establishes a broad basis for the stimulation of a sincere
spirit of public service and for the development of that capacity
for reliable work and judgment which makes safe the assumption
of responsibilities. *
The methods of instruction are planned with the view of
bringing out the powers and initiative of the students while
training them in habits of accurate analysis and careful work.
Students are encouraged to secure summer work which will
give them an insight into the various phases of the career upon
which they are about to enter, and the summer essays lay the
foundation for the ability to set forth, in clear and precise
language, descriptions and analyses of projects and engineering
activities. In the Fifth Year thesis an opportunity is given
for special investigation and research under the supervision of
experienced engineers.        , Courses in Applied Science
183
Fourth Year
Subject.
a-
First Term.
5*
S^
Ja
So..*
ess
IF
Second Term.
!*
s;
ft-
ess
5*
Essay	
C.E. 8 Foundations	
C.E. 9 Elementary Design...
CE. 10 Strength of Mtls	
&E. 11 Railways	
12 Hydraulics	
13 Mapping	
14 Surveying _	
15 Drawing	
6(b) Laboratory	
1 General	
1* Introductory	
CE
CE.
CE.
C.E.
M.E,
B.E.
Econ,
CE. 16 Surveying.
CE. 21 Water  Power..
CE. 28 Seminar	
178
217
218
218
219
219
219
219
220
240
243
226
220
222
225
2
2
Field Work
1   1
1   1
* Economics 1 in Arts will be accepted in lieu of the Science Course.
Fifth Year
Sa-
as
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
M a
frfe
ess
■SI*
P
1*
Ma
Is!
Ill
■88*
3*
Essay _	
CE. 17 Structural Design	
C.E. 18(a) Engineering Economics	
C.E. 18(b) Engineering Economics ...
CE. 19 Law—Contracts	
CE. 20 Geodesy .:	
CE. 22 Municipal	
CE. 23 Transportation.....	
C.E. 24 Mechanics of Mtls.	
178
220
221
221
221
221
222
223
223
224
224
224
225
225
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
Rec
1
1
6
2
3
6
uired
3
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
Sat. A.
1
1
6
2
3
CE. 25 Theory of Structures	
C.E. 26 Trips 	
6
M.
CE. 27 Thesis	
CE. 28 Seminar	
C.E. 29 Hydraulic Machines	
3
1 184
Faculty op Applied Science
IV.   Electrical Engineering
This course is designed for those students who desire a
general training in the theory and practice of Electrical Engineering. The Fourth Year of the course is devoted to the
study of the basic principles of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, and is intended to prepare the student for the more
specialized courses which are given in the Fifth Year. In the
Fifth Year an intensive course in all the important branches
of Design, Transmission, Electro-Technology, Radio and Electric
Traction, is given, together with thorough laboratory work in
most of these subjects.
Fourth Year
Subject.
Is
First Term.
S*
Ba*
ess
38*
Second Term.
Essay	
E.E. 2 Direct Current Technology	
E.E. 3 Elementary AC Technology..
E.E. 4 Direct Current Machine
Design .-.	
Math. 8 or 9 (Adv. Calculus)	
M.E. 8 Kinematics	
7 Heat Engines	
4 Dynamics ...
M.E
M.E
E.E.
5 Electrical and Magnetic Measurements and Instruments
E.E. 6 Electrical  Problem Course	
CE. 12 Hydraulics	
M.E. 5 Machine Design	
M.E. 5(a)  Problem Course in
Strength of Materials
and Design	
C.E. 10 Strength of  Materials	
178
244
245
245
238
239
241
240
245
246
219
240
240
218 Courses in Applied Science
185
Fifth
Year
o u
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
Ban
ess
n
SeS
i°*
"a
178
246
246
24T
243
242
247
247
238   /
248   1
249
241
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
2
1
1
3
2
6
2
2
2
2
1
2
►     3
2
1
1
E.E. 7 Design of Electrical
3
E.E. 8 Electrical Traction	
E.E. 9 Transmission and Distribution
of Electrical  Energy	
M.E. 15 Prime Movers	
M.E. 14 Mechanical Design	
E.E. 10 Electrical Problem Course
E.E. 11 Radio Telegraphy and
Radio Telephony. ,	
Math. 8 or 9 (Differential Equa. or
Adv. Calculus)	
2
E.E. 12 Electro-technology	
6
E.E. 13 Transient Phenomena and
M.E. 8 Steam Turbines ^
V.   Forest Engineering
In British Columbia the forest industries, including logging
and the manufacture of lumber, pulp and paper, now lead all
others, and are rapidly expanding. They must always play a
very important part in the economy of the Province, because
seven-eighths of the productive land is absolute forest soil, that
will grow good timber but no other crop of value; and because
over half the remaining stand of saw-timber — the last big
reserve — of Canada is here. The development of these industries is requiring more and more the services of engineers, and
especially is this true in logging. Furthermore, most of the
forest land is owned by the public, and the management of these
vast estates is a task that will require constant growth on the
part of the government forest services.
This indicates very briefly the various fields of service open
to Forest Engineers, and for which the course of studies is
designed. Primarily the course is planned for the lumber
industry, and a major part of the time — apart from the pre- 186
Faculty op Applied Science
liminary foundation work — is devoted to the branches of
engineering most used in it. In addition, the fundamental
subjects of forestry are covered. As in other engineering courses
the students are expected to obtain practical experience during
the summer vacations, this being an essential supplement to the
studies at the University.
Vancouver contains large sawmills, wood-working plants,
and plants for seasoning and preserving wood—more, in fact,
than any other place in the Province. Pulp mills, logging
operations and extensive forests are within easy reach. The
advantages of location are therefore exceptional. A special
feature is the affiliation of the Forest Products Laboratory of
Canada, maintained at the University by a co-operative arrangement with the Dominion Forestry Branch. A description of
this Laboratory and its activities is given in another part of
this calendar. It affords opportunities for instruction in testing
the mechanical properties of timber and other structural materials, and facilities are now provided for experimental and
demonstration work in wood seasoning.
FOURTB
| Year
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
Ma
fc £ 5
!§*
|1
ft
•§§£
Essay	
F.E. 1 General  Forestry 	
178
227
227
227
228
209
210
217
218
218
219
219
219
219
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
"i
2
2
2
3
3
3
l
l
l
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
F.E. 2 Mensuration*.	
F.E. 3 Protection	
F. E. 4 Finance	
4
2
Bot. 5 (b)  Dendrology	
E.E. 1 Fundamentals'.	
C.E. 8 (a)  Foundations..	
C.E. 9 Structural Design	
2
2
3
C.E. 10 Strength   Materials	
3
CE. 11 Railways	
C.E. 13 Mapping	
C.E. 14 Surveying	
3
C.E. 12 Hydraulics	
3
* Also 1 week Field Work immediately after spring examinations. Courses in Applied Science
187
Fifth Year
00 „
Ii
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
§1
eel
n
ess
*a
8>.
" a
Essay -	
178
F.E. 5 Technology	
228
2
3
2
3
F.E. 6 Organization	
228
i
1
F.E. 7 History	
229
i
1
F.E. 8 Silvicul ture	
229
2
2
3
F.E. 9 Lumbering	
229
2
1
F.E. 10 Logging	
229
Ii
4
1]
F.E. 11 Milling	
230
 \
4
F.E. 12 Products	
230
2J
Bot 6 (b)  Pathology    >
Zool. 7 Entomology       j
210
1
2
259
211
1
2
CE. 17 Structural Design	
220
1
3
1
3
CE. 18 Economics	
221
221
2
1
2
1
CE. 19 Law	
M.E. 6 (b) Steam Lab	
241
3
3
VI.   Geological Engineering
This course is designed to meet the requirements of students
who intend to enter Geology as a profession.
It gives a broad training not only in Geology, but also in
the sciences of Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics,
which are extensively applied in the solution of geological
problems. The engineering subjects are useful not only to the
Mining and Consulting Geologist and the Geological Surveyor,
but to the Geologist engaged in original research in any branch
of the science.
The course therefore furnishes a foundation for the professions of Mineralogist, Geological Surveyor, Mining Geologist,
Consulting Geologist, Palaeontologist, Geographer, etc., and is
useful for those who will be in any way connected with the
discovery or development of the natural resources of the country.
As a supplement to the work in the classroom, laboratory 188
Faculty op Applied Science
and field during the session, the student is expected to obtain
practical experience during the summer vacations.
Students are advised to become  student members of the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
Fourth Year
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
b>«
ess
n
1*-
1-4 a
Essay	
178
Geol. 2 Mineralogy	
233
2
2
2
2
Geol. 3 Historical	
234
3
Geol. 4 Structural	
234
3
Geol. 5 Regional	
234
3
1
3
1
Chem. 4 Theoretical	
212
2
3
2
3
Min. 1 Metal  Mining	
249
2
2
Met 5 Fire Assaying	
252
1
5
Met 1 General	
251
2
	
2
Ore Dressing 1 General	
252
2
2
Zool. 1	
259
2
2
2
2
CE. 13 Mapping	
219
3
Chem.   5*   Adv.   Analysis	
v   213
1
6
1
6
Met 6* Wet Assaying	
1   252
3
3
* Either Chem. 5 or Met 6 must be taken.
Fifth Year
Subject.
First Term.
3£
II*
Second Term.
P
"a
III
Essay	
Geol. 6 Palaeontology!	
Geol. 7 Petrology	
Geol. 8 Economic	
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics	
Geol. 9 Mineralography	
Geol. 10 Field	
Min. 2 Coal and Placer	
Min. 3 Metal   Mining	
Min. 5 Surveying	
Met. 2 Smelting	
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory
Thesis	
178
235
235
235
221
235
236
250
250
250
251
253 Courses in Applied Science 189
VII.    Mechanical Engineering
The course in Mechanical Engineering has been designed
to give the student a thorough knowledge of the theory and
application of those basic subjects which are essential in this
branch of Engineering.
With this in view stress has been laid upon such subjects
as Mathematics, Physics, Applied Mechanics, Strength of Materials, Applied Thermodynamics and Hydraulics. Graduates of
this course are therefore qualified to enter upon any of the
many specialized branches of this profession, especially in
British Columbia, whose rapid industrial development demands
Mechanical Engineers prepared to attack a great diversity of
problems.
Although fundamentally general in character the course
embodies design of prime movers; mechanical, electrical, and
hydraulic machinery design; power plant operation and design;
and the testing of engines and power plants, thus giving sufficient specialized training in Mechanical Engineering to enable
students to enter the field of design or research should they so
desire.
Students following this course are given a general course
in the fundamentals of Electrical Engineering. 190
Faculty op Applied Science
Fourth Year
03 .,
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
SS-3
fa "
"a
b*-
oS .
rt w <o
fe h *
!§*
5*
8-S
M a
b>"
ea m v
K k. a,
II*
C.E. 10 Strength  of Materials	
218
239
240
240
240
241
242
243
219
238
238
178
2
2
2
2
3
1
3
1
3
3
1
3
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
1
3
1
3
3
M.E. 3 Kinematics	
M.E. 4 Dynamics of Machines	
M.E. 5 Machine Design...	
M.E. 5 (a) Problems in Materials
1
M.E. 7 Heat Engines	
3
M.E. 13 Physical Treatment of
Metals	
2
E.E. 2 and  3  General	
3
CE. 12 Hydraulics	
Math. 8 Advanced Calculus or         1
Math. 9 Differential Equations        J
Essay	
3
Fifth Year
.2 ••
Qtt.
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
■jB-tJ
-"a
2es
!§*
" a
03 00 41
!§*
3*
M.E. 8 Steam   Turbines	
M.E. 9 Internal Combustion Eng.
M.E. 10 Refrigeration	
*M.E. 11 Heating and Ventilation
M.E. 12 Power Plant Design	
M.E. 15 Prime Movers	
241
241
241
242
242
243
243
243
243
243
249
238
238
178
i}
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
5
3
5
2
5
1}
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
5
3
5
M.E. 17 Mechanics  of Materials
*M.E. 18 Aeronautics	
M.E. 19 Problems in Mech. and
Elec.  Eng.	
2
E.E. 14 General	
5
Math. 9 Differential Equations or
Math. 8 Adv. Calculus	
* Alternative subjects. Courses in Applied Science 191
VIII.-IX.    Metallurgical and Mining Engineering
Modern Metallurgical practice covers a wide and expanding
field. The Metallurgical Engineer has to design and operate a
great variety of plants and processes. He must be able to deal
with furnace and solution processes, based on chemical principles, and mechanical crushing and separating processes, based
on physical principles, together with an immense variety of principal and auxiliary machinery, from small to immense, used in
the separation and refining of ores, artificial mineral products
and metals. The whole forms a keenly competitive and strictly
commercial industry, based on, and closely limited by, the
practical economic considerations of costs and profits. Rapid
and continuous change and improvement is the rule. Methods
and machines quickly become obsolete. The field for research
and improvement in methods and machinery is ever widening,
though the economic margin is ever narrowing.
The Metallurgical course, in the Fourth and Fifth Years,
based on the fundamental earlier years, is designed to give the
student a broad general knowledge of standard metallurgical
methods and machinery, with a fundamental grasp of the actual
applications of the basic sciences in practical metallurgical
operations, also sufficient laboratory practice to illustrate and
fix these in his mind and train him for an actual junior position
after graduation.
Modern mining operations cover a field notable for its
breadth and variety. The discovery, steadily becoming more
difficult, and the development, steadily becoming more scientific,
of new mineral deposits are based largely on a knowledge of
the laws and processes of Nature, ultimately physical and
chemical, but, immediately, chiefly geological in kind. On
the other hand, the operations of actual mining are largely
mechanical in kind, and call for use and knowledge of mechanical
and electrical equipment, adapted to underground methods and
conditions.
The conditions under which mining operations are carried
on are often of great natural difficulty, and many of the factors
to be dealt with are, to a large extent, obscure or indefinite 192 Faculty op Applied Science
oftener than measurable. The qualities of good judgment and
decision are therefore of great importance in the application
of technical knowledge to mining. As in metallurgy, economic
considerations are paramount.
The Mining course is correspondingly broad in scope. In
addition to the fundamental sciences, it includes fundamental
subjects in Civil, Electrical and Mechanical Engineering,
Economics and Economic Geology.
The special mining subjects cover the underlying principles
and practice on which the discovery, development and economic
operation of mines are based, the practical application of technical knowledge to actual operations, and the use of judgment
and decision, by precept, example and illustration. Sufficient
practical training and laboratory work are included to fit the
student for an actual junior position after graduation. "While
not given as separate subjects, the social, administrative and
ethical sides of the professions of Mining and Metallurgy are
included in the general treatment of appropriate subjects.
In this University, emphasis is naturally placed on British
Columbia conditions and its chief mineral products, namely:
Gold, Silver, Lead, Zinc, Copper, Coal and Coke.
The University is conveniently located in proximity to coal
and metal mining districts, large coal and metal mining operations being carried on within a few hours' journey, in connection
with which there are large washing and ore concentration plants.
There is a large metallurgical plant at Tacoma, within an easy
day's journey. Students have little difficulty in obtaining
positions in mines or smelters during their vacation, as several
of the larger companies have established the practice of accepting student employees in reasonable numbers during the vacation
months.
Students are recommended to spend their vacations at practical works, in connection with Metallurgy or Mining, and are
required to do so between the Fourth and Fifth Years as an
essential part of their course, without which a degree will not Courses in Applied Science
193
be granted.   An essay covering this work is also required, as
specified in the Fifth Year curriculum.
Students are advised to become student members of the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
VIII.    Metallurgical Engineering
Fourth Year
Subject.
a*
£»
First Term.
5*
a
So,*
ess
il*
Second Term.
ft
ess
II*
Essay	
Econ. 1	
CE. 9 Elem. Design	
CE. 10 Str. of Materials
CE. 12 Hydraulics	
CE. 13 Mapping.	
M.E. 6 (b)   Laboratory	
Geol. 2 Mineralogy	
E.E. 1 General	
Min. 1 Metal Mining	
Ore Dressing 1 General	
Met. 1 General	
Met. 5 Fire Assay	
Met. 6 Wet Assay	
178
226
218
218
219
219
241
233
243
249
252
251
252
252
Fifth
Year
3§
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
ft.
ess
fg*
|s*
Essay	
Geol. 9 Mineralography	
178
235
235
221
214
253
250
251
251
252
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
3
9
9
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
CE. 18 Engr.   Economics	
Chem. 8 Electro-	
1
3
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory	
9
Min. 3. Metal Mining	
Met. 2 Smelting	
Met 3 Calculations 	
Met. 4 Analysis	
"si 194
Faculty op Arts and Science
IX.    Mining Engineering
Fourth Year
As in Metallurgical Engineering.    (See Page 193.)
Fifth Year
95 ..
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
1
b>"
a aj<
CO oi 0J
b ki V
i§*
a
tresis
!§*
Essay	
Geol. 7 Petrology	
Geol. 8 Economic	
CE. 18 Engr.   Economics	
CE. 19 Engr. Law	
Met. 2 Smelting	
178
235
235
221
221
251
253
250
250
280
250
251
250
2
3
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
4
1
9
3
2
3
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
4
1
9
Min. 2 Coal  and   Placer .,
Min. 3 Metal   Mining	
Min. 4 Machinery	
Min. 7 Methods	
Min. 6 Design	
3
Short Courses in Mining
In place of the short day-time courses in Mining given at
the University in previous years, Short Courses in Mining Subjects will be given each year as' night classes in connection with
the British Columbia Chamber of Mines and the Vancouver
School Board. Classes are held on Monday and Thursday
evenings and include lectures on Mining, Smelting, Ore Dressing, Geology and Mineralogy, with practical laboratory work
in Mineralogy. These courses usually begin about November
1st and continue until the end of March.
The classes are open to prospectors, business men and any
others interested. A fee of $5.00 is charged for the full courses,
and registration should be made at the office of the Chamber
of Mines, 402 Pender St. "W., Vancouver, B. C. Correspondence
in regard to the courses and applications for registration, accompanied by fee, should be addressed to the Chamber of Mines. Courses in Applied Science 195
X.   Nursing and Health
1. Nursing A.—A five-year undergraduate course. (See
below.)
2. Nursing B.—A graduate course of one academic year in
Public Health Nursing.    (See Page 199.)
3. Nursing C.—A graduate course of one academic year in
Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. (See Page
200.)
Registration for these courses will be subject to the general
University Regulations (see Pages 45-47) and to the special
requirements of the Department.
All regulations are subject to change from year to year, and
subjects or courses may be modified during the year as the
Faculty may deem advisable.
Nursing A (Five-year Undergraduate Course)
This is a five-year combined course leading to the Degree of
B.A.Sc. (Nursing) and to the Diploma in Nursing of an associated hospital. It is given by the University in co-operation
with the Schools of Nursing of associated hospitals, which means
those hospitals that have signified their willingness to supply the
professional part of the course, and have received the approval
of the University Senate for that purpose. Up to the present
time the Vancouver General Hospital is the only hospital which
has entered into association with the University to this end.
The course is open to applicants who meet the general requirements mentioned above, and who, in the opinion of the
Department, are personally fitted for the profession of nursing.
In addition they must satisfy the entrance requirements of the
associated Hospital Schools of Nursing; the individual applicant must make her arrangements for admission to the associated
hospital directly with the Superintendent of Nurses and in
advance of the opening of the University term.
Nurses who have graduated from a hospital that is in affiliation with this University or otherwise approved of by the Senate,
may be awarded the degree on complying with the following
conditions: 196 Faculty op Applied Science
1. They shall have matriculated.
2. They shall take, or shall have taken, the full academic
training laid down for this course. At least one year of
such training shall be, or shall have been, taken in the
University of British Columbia.
3. Except under special circumstances, the course shall be
entered upon within two years of the time of graduating
as a nurse.
The aim of the five-year combined course is to afford a
broader education ^than can be given by the Hospital Schools of
Nursing alone, and thus to build a sound foundation for those
who desire to fit themselves for Teaching and Supervision in
Schools of Nursing or for Public Health Nursing service.
The First and Second Years, which are academic, give the
students an introduction to general cultural subjects and a
foundation in the sciences underlying the practice of nursing.
Between the First and Second Years a probationary period of
four months will be spent in an associated Hospital School of
Nursing. The Third and Fourth Years are devoted to professional training in an associated Hospital, and are planned to
afford experience and training in the care of the sick, and to
develop the skill, observation and judgment necessary to the
efficient practice of nursing. The Fifth Year affords two alternative courses, one in Public Health Nursing (Nursing B) and the
second in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing
(Nursing C). Courses in Applied Science
197
First Year (Academic)
feSS
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
8-8'
H
Sa*-
ess
■P*
IS-*
§8
•Sfe
b*
ess
II*
English 1 (a)	
129
129
149
113
154
142
159
105
99
255
2
2
3
4
3
2
1
3
2
2
2
8
4
3
2
1
English 1(b)	
or Latin 1 f
or French 1 f
or History 1, 2, or 3  J
Chemistry 1	
3
Biology 1	
2
History of Nursing	
Probationary Period (Hospital)
It is expected that the probationary period of four months
(to be spent in an associated hospital), will be taken between
the first and second academic years. The student must, however, meet the admission requirements of the associated Hospital
School of Nursing (which requirements each student will learn
upon making application to the School). The student must have
attained such age as may be fixed by the associated Hospital
School of Nursing—in the Vancouver General Hospital School
of Nursing the eighteenth birthday must be passed; and her
academic standing must be acceptable to the associated Hospital
School of Nursing.
During this period the student will undergo rigid examination as to fitness in physique, temperament and character for
the practice of nursing. This will afford the Hospital School of
Nursing information upon which to judge the student's qualifications for the profession of nursing. It also enables the student
to determine whether she feels herself personally fitted or inclined to proceed in the course. The Hospital Schools of Nursing
reserve the right to reject candidates who do not reach the
required standards. 198
Faculty op Applied Science
Second Year (Academic)
Subject.
First Term.
e3 m dj
i=*
Second Term.
2fe
gajj
ess
English 2(a)	
English 2(b)	
Zoology 1	
Physics 1 or 2	
Economics 1	
Bacteriology 1	
Bacteriology 2	
Anatomy and Physiology
129
130
167
163
115
97
97
256
Third and Fourth Years (Professional)
The Third and Fourth Years will be spent in practical
training in an associated Hospital School of Nursing. Students
in these years are required to register with the University even
though during this portion of the course they are in residence
at the Hospital. During these professional years students are
subject to the authority and are under the direction of the
officers of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing. The
required professional period is twenty-eight months, in which
is included the probationary period of four months. Full maintenance and such allowance as the associated Hospital authorities
may designate are accorded, and a yearly vacation of three
weeks is granted at the convenience of the Superintendent of the
School of Nursing.
Instruction in the following Nursing subjects is given by
members of the medical staff of the associated Hospital and by
qualified nurse instructors: Introductory Ethics of Nursing;
Practical Nursing Procedure; Elementary Nutrition and
Cookery; Drugs and Solutions; Materia Medica; Surgical
Nursing; Medical Nursing (including charting); Gynecological
Nursing; Nursing of Communicable Diseases; Obstetrical Nursing; Diet in Disease; Pediatric Nursing and Infant Feeding; Courses in Applied Science 199
Nursing in Diseases of the Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat; Nursing
in Tuberculosis; Urinalysis; Introduction to Anaesthesia; Introduction to Physiotherapy and X-Ray.
This schedule is open to change at any time, at the discretion of the associated Hospital School of Nursing.
The period of Hospital service includes actual nursing
experience in the following departments:
Medical. Operating Room.
Surgical. Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat.
Gynecological. Obstetrical.
Pediatric and Orthopaedic. Infectious.
Observation and Neurological. Tuberculosis.
Infants. Diet Kitchen.
The Social Service Department of the Hospital offers opportunity for a four weeks' service to a limited number of students.
Selection will be made by the Superintendent of Nurses from
the students desirous of receiving this course.
Fifth Year (Academic and Professional)
The Fifth Year will be spent in either Nursing B or Nursing
C, at the option of the student. The selection between these
courses need not be made until registering with the University
for the Fifth Year.
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work in
the University and appropriate field work under the supervision
of the various associated Public Health organizations. This
course leads to a Certificate in Public Health Nursing. 200
Faculty op Applied Science
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
Subject.
For Details
See Page:
Total Hours
Lectures.
Total Hours
Laboratory.
Preventable   Diseases	
Epidemiology...	
Tuberculosis	
Venereal   Diseases	
Mental Hygiene _	
Bacteriology	
Infant Welfare	
Orthopedics	
Public Health	
Public Health Administration	
Public Health Organizations	
Vital   Statistics	
Principles and Practice of Public
Health  Nursing	
Urban Visiting Nursing Programme	
Health Education	
History of Nursing and Contemporary
Nursing Problems	
School Hygiene	
Social Case Work	
Hospital Social Service	
Metabolism and Nutrition	
Psychology  for  Nurses	
Principles of Education Applied to
Teaching	
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure <,	
Sociology	
Geography  10	
Motor Mechanics	
Field Work...
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
257
257
257
257
257
257
257
258
258
258
258
258
258
258
258
259
259
259
259
17
17
8
3
9
11
3
17
4
4
16
51
2
34
18
13
6
2
8
16
34
18
18
16
10
To run concurrently
with the academic
work,
* Hours to be arranged.
Nursing C (Teaching and Supervision)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work in
the University, and opportunity for practice teaching and for
the observation of Training School administration and ward
supervision in associated Hospitals. This course leads to a
Certificate in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. Courses in Applied Science
201
Nursing C
Subject.
Preventable Diseases	
Bacteriology	
History of Nursing and Contemporary
Nursing  Problems	
Teaching in Schools of Nursing	
Principles of Supervision in Schools
of  Nursing „	
Metabolism and  Nutrition -	
Psychology for  Nurses	
Principles of Education Applied to
Teaching.	
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure	
Sociology	
Health Education	
Electives from Nursing B or from
related Science Courses (to make
up three units)	
Field  Work	
For Details
See Page:
256
256
258
258
258
258
258
258
259
259
258
Below
Total Hours
Lectures.
17
18
51
34
8
16
34
18
18
34
Total Hours
Laboratory.
* Hours to be arranged.
Field Work in Nursing B and C
Through the courtesy and co-operation of the following
agencies arrangements have been made for supervised field work,
or observation:
FOR NURSING B
Vancouver General Hospital.—The Social Service Department, Miss M. McLennan, Director.
The Provincial Department of Health.—Dr. H. E. Young,
Provincial Health Officer.
The Victorian Order of Nurses.—Miss M. Duffield, District
Superintendent.
The Medical Department of the Vancouver Public Schools.—
Dr. H. "White, Medical Director; Miss E. Breeze, Director,
School Hygiene. 202 Faculty op Applied Science
The Vancouver Rotary Clinic for Diseases of the Chest.—
Dr. H. A. Rawlings, Director.
The Department of Child Hygiene, City of Vancouver.—
Dr. F. T. Underhill, City Health Officer; Miss L. Sanders,
Supervisor, Department of Child Hygiene.
The Government Venereal Disease Clinic.—Dr. J. Ewart
Campbell, Director; Miss E. V. Cameron, Nurse in charge.
The Provincial Mental Hospital, Essondale.—Dr. A. L.
Crease, Medical Superintendent.
FOR NURSING C
The Vancouver General Hospital.—Dr. F. C. Bell, Superintendent ; Miss Grace Fairley, Superintendent of Nurses.
The academic work and field work will run concurrently
throughout the two University terms, with the exception of the
last four weeks of the Second Term, which, in Nursing B, will
be devoted entirely to field work under the supervision of the
Provincial Rural Public Health Nursing organizations and, in
Nursing C, to such Hospital Service as may be arranged by the
Associated Hospitals. Field work for some students may have
to be delayed until after the close of the University year.
During the period spent in the Hospital, all students will
be subject to the authority, and under the direction, of the officers
of the Associated Hospital School of Nursing.
Adequate opportunity for observation, as well as for practice, is thus afforded in all of the more important fields of Public
Health Nursing and in the field of Teaching and Supervision
in Schools of Nursing.
Admission to Nursing B and C
The courses are open to students of the five-year course,
and also to nurses who have graduated from recognized Schools
of Nursing, who are eligible for registration in British Columbia
and who are personally fitted for their proposed work. For
Nursing C it is also required that applicants shall fulfil the
University Educational requirement of Junior Matriculation. Courses in Applied Science 203
Applications for admission to the courses of Nursing B or C
should be sent to the Department of Nursing and Health not
later than July 15th of the current year. A certificate of good
health and physical condition, signed by a regular practising
physician, must be presented with the applications.
As a preparation for Nursing B, nurses without previous
Public Health Nursing service are advised to obtain at least one
month's experience in a visiting nursing agency, or other public
health or social agency approved by the Department. "While not
obligatory, this month is most important, and various Field
Agencies—the Provincial Board of Health, the Vancouver
General Hospital Social Service Department and the Victorian
Order of Nurses, have each agreed to receive nurses for this
month in so far as it can be arranged. Inquiry should be made
at as early a date as possible to the Department of Nursing and
Health that arrangements may be made with the Field Agencies.
Nurses will be responsible for their own maintenance, and will
receive no remuneration during this period.
Nurses registering for Nursing C who have had no experience in family case-work, social service or visiting nursing, are
also advised to secure this month's experience with one of the
Public Health organizations if possible.
For the convenience of graduate nurses already engaged in
nursing, who wish to take Nursing B or C, but are unable to take
a year off, provision is made that either one may be taken as a
part-time course over a period of two or more years. Nurses
registering in this way must fulfil the same requirements as the
regular-course students.
&G&&hte COURSE FOR THE^ DEGREES OF
B.A. AND B.A.Sc. f j ft
Two complete years in Arts and Science and four complete
years in Applied Science are required for a Double Degree.
Consequently students must not select courses in Arts and
Science that are included in the Applied Science years, on
account of time-table difficulties. 204 Faculty of Applied Science
The requirements for the first and second years are as set
forth in the Calendar for the first and second years of Arts
(Pages 73-75) except as follows:
1. Physics 1 or 2 and Chemistry 1 must be taken. The
passing grade for each of these subjects is fifty per cent.
(See also, admission to Applied Science, Page 172.) Students are recommended to take Mathematics 2 (c) (calculus) .
2. Biology 1, Chemistry 2, Geology 1, Mathematics 2 (a)
and 2 (b), and Physics 3 or 5 or 6 may not be taken.
These subjects are covered later in Applied Science.
3. A course in German is recommended (and, for those
intending to enter Geological or Civil Engineering,
French also). Two years in the language elected is necessary to count towards a degree.
The third, fourth, fifth and sixth years of the double course
correspond to the second, third, fourth and fifth years of
Applied Science. The degree of B.A. is conferred on completing
the fifth year of this course.
COURSE FOR THE COMBINED DEGREES OF
B.A.  AND  B.A.Sc.   (IN  NURSING)
First Year
Second Year
English 1.
Mathematics 1.
Language 1.
Physics 1 or 2 or
Chemistry 1.
English 2.
Language 2.
Chemistry 1 or
Physics 1 or 2.
Zoology 1.
Economics 1 or
Biology 1.
History 1 or
History of Nursing.
1 unit.
Philosophy 1.
Anatomy and Physiology.
2units.
Third Year
Bacteriology 1 and 2.
4 units.
Sociology or Public Health.
3 units, Courses in Applied Science 205
Nine additional units to be chosen in accordance with Calendar regulations, not more than three of which may be chosen
from First and Second Year Subjects. 9 units.
Fourth and Fifth Years (Professional)
Degree of B.A. granted on completion of the Fifth Year.
Sixth Year
As the present Fifth Year, except that there shall be an
option between Public Health and Sociology. 3 units.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.Sc.
1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Applied Science
must hold a B.A.Sc. degree from this University, or its
equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission
to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his
application an official statement of his graduation together with
a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of
his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a
student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records
who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
(a.)  To spend one year in resident graduate study; or
(b.)   (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned):
(i.) To do two or more years of private work
under the supervision of the University,
such work to be equivalent to one year of
graduate study; or
(ii.) To do one year of private work under
University supervision and one term of
resident graduate study, the total of such
work to be equivalent to one year of
resident graduate study.
* 206 Faculty of Applied Science
4. One major and one minor shall be required and a thesis
must be prepared on some approved topic in the major subject.
(Two typewritten copies of each thesis shall be submitted. See
special circular of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters'
Theses.")
The choice of and relationship between major and minor
subjects, and the amount of work in each, or of tutorial work,
must be approved by each of the departments concerned, by the
Committee on graduate studies, and by the Dean.
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher
Training Course, First or Second Class standing in each of
(1) History and Principles of Education, and in (2) Educational Psychology, is accepted as equivalent to a Minor for an
M.A.Sc. degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head
of the Department in which the student wishes to take his
Major.
5. Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be required,
and a standing equivalent to at least 75 per cent, in the major
subjects and 65 per eent. in the minor.
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall
be made to the Registrar by October 1st. For fees see Pages
48-50.
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations are held in December and in April.
December examinations will be held in all subjects of the Second
and Third Years, and are obligatory for all students of these
years. December examinations in subjects of the Fourth and
Fifth Years, excepting those subjects that are completed before
Christmas, shall be optional with the Departments concerned.
Applications for special consideration on account of illness or
domestic affliction must be submitted to the Dean not later than
two days after the close of the examination period. In cases
where illness is the plea for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented on the appropriate form which
may be obtained from the Dean's office.
2. Candidates in order to pass must obtain at least 50 per
cent, in each subject.    The grades are as follows: First Class, Examinations and Advancement 207
an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per
cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. But in the First and Second
Years of the course in Nursing and Health the requirements for
passing are the same as those for the First and Second Years
in Arts and Science.    (See Pages 73-75.)
3. If a student's general standing in the final examinations
of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him
supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which
he has failed. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such
examinations have been granted.
4. Supplemental examinations will be held on September
16th, 17th, 18th and 19th. Special examinations will not be
granted, except by special permission* of the Faculty, and on
payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper, and then only during the
third week in October or the second week of January.
5. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied
by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees, Pages 48-50) must
be in the hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the
date set for the examinations.
6. No student may enter the third or higher year with supplemental examinations still outstanding in respect of more
than 4 units of the preceding year, or with any supplemental
examination outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier
year unless special permission* to do so is granted by Faculty.
Students in Nursing A must remove all outstanding supplemental examinations before entering their third year.
7. No student will be allowed to take any subject unless he
has previously passed, or secured exemption, in all prerequisite
subjects. If any subject has another which is concurrent with it,
both must be taken in the same session.
8. A student who is required to repeat his year will not be
allowed to take any work in a higher year.   Such a student need
•Special permission of the Faculty is granted only under exceptional
circumstances, such as illness, or as outlined on Pages 174-175. 208 Faculty op Applied Science
not repeat, however, any of the following subjects: Civil Engineering 2, 5, 7, 13, or Mechanical Engineering 1 or 2a in which
he has made 65 per cent,
9. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year
may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by
the Senate to withdraw from the University.
10. Any student whose academic record, as determined by
the tests and examinations of the first term of the Second or
Third Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the
recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to
discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of
the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the
University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding.
11. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a
passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English.
DEPARTMENTS IN APPLIED SCIENCE
N.B.—The following subjects may be modified during the
year as the Senate may deem advisable.
Department of Botany
Professor: A. H. Hutchinson.
Associate Professor: Frank Dickson.
Associate Professor: John Davidson.
Assistant: Jean Davidson.
Assistant: Josephine   Hart,
Assistant: L. M. Black.
Assistant: A.  E.  Hensley.
Assistant: M. R. Ashton.
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to
more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses
closely related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture,
Forestry, Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division
of labour; life-histories; relation to environment. Botany 209
Text-book: Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea & Febiger,
1924.
The course is prerequisite to all other courses in Biology.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week.
2. Principles of Genetics.—As in Arts.   See Page 99.
3. General Physiology.—As in Arts.   See Page 100.
Botany
1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of
the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized
courses in Botany.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany.
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press. 1
This course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany except
the Evening Course. Partial credit (2 units) toward Botany
may be obtained through the Evening Course.    (See Page 104.)
Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory per
week.
2. Morphology.   As in Arts.   See Page 100.
3. Plant Physiology.   As in Arts.   See Page 101.
4. Histology.—A study of the structure and development
of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning,
staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope,
camera lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-book: W. C. Stevens, Plant Anatomy, P. Blakiston.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per
week.   Second Term.
5. Systematic Botany.
5. (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of economic 210 Faculty op Applied Science
plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine
and industrial arts; harmful to crops and stock. "Weeds and
poisonous plants.   Methods of control.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, Jepson
University of California. Thomas and Sifton, Poisonous Plants
and Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First
term.
5. (b) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of Canada,
the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of
the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis
on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada,
Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa. Sudworth, Forest Trees of
the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, "Washington,
D.C.; Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew,
T. F. Unwin.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory
or field work per week.
5. (c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—As in Arts.    See Page 102.
6. (a) General Plant Pathology.—Identification and life-
histories of parasites causing plant-diseases; means of combating
them.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week.   Second Term.
6. (b) Forest Pathology.—Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant
parasites of forests.
Text-book:  Rankin,  Manual  of  Tree  Diseases,  Macmillan. Chemistry 211
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week during one-half of one term.
7. (a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The inter-relations
of forests and their environment; the biological characteristics
of important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions;
physiography.
Reference books: "Whitford and Craig, Forests of British
Columbia, Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forests of the World,
McGraw-Hill; Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford University Press.
One lecture per week during one term. Field trips and
laboratory work during the session amounting to thirty hours,
one period per week.
Department of Chemistry
Professor: R. H. Clark.
Professor of Analytical  Chemistry: E.  H. Archibald.
Associate Professor: W.  F.  Seyer.
Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: J. Allen  Harris.
Assistant Professor: William Ure.
Instructor: John Allardyce.   (Absent on leave.)
Assistant: E. G. Hallonquist.
Assistant: F. L. Munro.
Assistant: R. H. Fleming.
Assistant: Frances  L.  Fowler.
Assistant: H.  B.  Marshall.
Assistant: D. W. Oswald.
1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give a
full exposition of the general principles involved in modern
Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the properties of
the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their
compounds, and the application of Chemistry in technology.
Text-book: Kendall, General Chemistry, Century Co.
Three lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a)  Qualitative  Analysis.—During  the  first  six  weeks of 212 Faculty op Applied Science
the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a part
of the laboratory work.
Text-book: A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
For reference: F. "W. Millar, Elementary Theory of Qualitative Analysis, Century Co.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more
important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis.
Text-book: Cumming & Kay, Quantitative Analysis, Gurney
& Jackson.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
Course (6) must be preceded by Course (a).
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of
the compounds of carbon will include the method of preparation
and a description of the more important groups of compounds
in both the fatty and the aromatic series.
Chemistry 3 will also be given to those students taking
Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2.
Text-books: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic Chemistry, "Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods of Organic
Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
4. (a) Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course in
the development of modern theoretical chemistry, including a
study of gases, liquids and solids, solutions, ionization and
electrical conductivity, chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions, thermochemistry and thermodynamics, colloids.
Text-book: Millard, Physical Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-Hill. Chemistry 213
References: Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles, Macmillan. For laboratory use: Findlay, Practical Physical Chemistry, Longmans; and Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on
Physical-Chemical Principles.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 (except for students majoring in
Physics). Honor students majoring in Chemistry should take
Mathematics 10 concurrently.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week.     3 units.
4 (6) This course is the same as Chemistry 4 (a) with the
omission of the laboratory, and is open only to students not
majoring in Chemistry. 2 units.
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this course will
include the detection and separation of the less common metals,
particularly those that are important industrially, together with
the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in
nature.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per
week.   First Term.
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will
include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks,
as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles
on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more
minute consideration than was possible in the elementary course.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per
week.   Second Term.
6. Industrial Chemistry. — Those industries which are
dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be
considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures
will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments
in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be
given by specialists in their respective fields.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures per week. 214 Faculty op Applied Science
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation of
Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory of
gases, properties of liquids and solids, elementary thermodynamics and thermochemistry, properties of solutions, theoretical electrochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions,
radioactivity.
Books recommended: Getman, Outlines of Theoretical
Chemistry, "Wiley; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan; for Laboratory: Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments
on Physico-Chemical Principles, Macmillan; Findlay, Practical
Physical Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures and three hours' laboratory per week.
3 units.
8. Electrochemistry.—
(a) As in Arts.    (See Page 108.)
(b) Electric furnaces, electrolytic refining and deposition of metals will be studied in detail.
Text-book: Thompson, Theoretical and Applied Electrochemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. iy2 units.
9. Advanced Organic Chemistry. — As in Arts. (See
Page 108. )f
11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See Page
108.)
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—As in Arts.    (See Page 109.)
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years)
16. Chemical Engineering. — Theory and design of fractionating columns, condensers, multiple effect evaporators;
chamber, tunnel, drum, rotary and spray driers. Theory and
practice of technical filtration; calculation of capacity of box
filters, filter presses, centrifugals, etc. Principles of counter
current extraction. Civil Engineering 215
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4.
Text-book: "Walker, Lewis & McAdams, Principles of
Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
Reference books: Liddell, Handbook of Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill; Robinson, Elements of Practical Distillation,
McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week.
The following firms have kindly permitted the students in
Chemical Engineering to work one day a week in their plants
as part of their practical training:
British Columbia Electric Railway Co.  (Gas Department).
Sherwin-Williams Co. of Canada, Limited.
Royal Crown Soaps, Limited.
Imperial Oil Company, Limited,   i
B. C. Refractories, Limited.
Triangle Chemical Company, Limited.
"Westminster Paper Mills.
Canadian Carbonate, Limited.
17. Chemical Thermodynamics. — As in Arts. (See Page
109.)
(Given in 1931-32 and alternate years)
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. — As in Arts. (See
Page 110.)
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years)
21. Chemical Kinetics.—As in Arts.    (See Page 110.)
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years)
Department of Civil Engineering
Professor: Wm.  E.  Duckering.
Associate Professor: E. G. Matheson.
Assistant Professor: F.  A.  Wilkin.
Assistant Professor: A. H.  Finlay.
Assistant Professor: A.   Lighthall.
Instructor: A. G. Stuart.
Instructor: J. C. Oliver. 216 Faculty op Applied Science
1. Descriptive Geometry. — Geometrical drawing; orthographic, isometric and axometric projections.
Text-book: Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, second edition,
Wiley.
One three-hour period per week.
Mr. Matheson, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Stuart, Mr.
Oliver.
2. Field Work 1.—Elementary surveying. Practical problems involving the use of the chain, telemeter, compass, transit
and level. Traverses, closed circuits, contour and detail surveys.
Levels! f°r profiles, benches and contours.
Work commences immediately upon the close of spring
examinations, and consists of field work, eight hours per day for
twenty days, or equivalent.
Mr. Stuart, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Oliver.
4. Graphical Statics. — Elementary theory of structures;
composition of forces; general methods involving the force and
equilibrium polygons; determination of resultants, reactions,
centres of gravity, bending moments; stress in framed structures, cranes, towers, roof-trusses and bridge-trusses. Algebraic
check methods will be used throughout.
Text-book: Hudson and Squire, Elements of Graphic Statics,
McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Physics 6 must either precede or accompany
Civil 4.
One two-hour period per week.  Mr. Finlay, Mr. Lighthall.
5. Mapping 1.—Draughting from notes obtained in Civil 2.
Maps of telemeter, compass and transit surveys. Contour and
topographical maps in convention or color.
Prerequisite: Civil 2.
One three-hour period per week. Mr. Stuart.
6. Surveying 1.—Chain and angular surveying; the construction, adjustment and use of the transit, level, compass, stadia,
minor field instruments, planimeter, and pantograph; leveling; Civil Engineering 217
topography; contour surveying; stadia; railway curves; vertical
curves; transition curves.
Prerequisite: Civil 2, Math. 1.
Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Elementary Surveying, Vol.
I, Wiley.
References: Allen, Curves and Earthwork, McGraw-Hill;
Sullivan, Spiral Tables, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week.   Mr. Stuart,
7. Field Work 2.—(a) Railway surveys, reconnaissance,
preliminary and location surveys, methods of taking topography,
cross-sectioning; estimating quantities; running in easement and
vertical curves, etc. The notes secured will be used in class work
for mapping and for estimating quantities and costs.
(b) Hydrographie surveys, topography of a section of
river-bed by sounding and fixing position by transits and
sextants; the three-point problem; stream-gauging by surface
and deep floats and by the current meter.
(c) Solar and stellar observations for latitude and azimuth;
adjustments of instruments; the use of plane table, sextant and
minor instruments.
Prerequisite: Civil 2.
Time, same as for Civil 2.
Mr. Matheson, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall.
8. Foundations and Masonry.—(a) Borings; bearing power
of soils; pile and other foundations; cofferdams; caissons; open
dredging; pneumatic and freezing processes; retaining walls;
estimates of quantities and costs.
Prerequisite: Civil 4; Civil 10 must either precede or be
taken concurrently.
Text-book: Jacoby and Davis, Foundations of Bridges and
Buildings, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture and one three-hour period per week. First Term.
Mr. Matheson.
(6) Theory of Earth Pressure; combined stresses, ellipse
of stress, principal and conjugate axes, as applied to the de- 218 Faculty op Applied Science
termination of earth pressures; Rankine's, Coulomb's, Wey-
rauch's, Cain's and Rebhann's theories and solutions for earth
pressure; retaining walls; dams.
Prerequisite: Civil 4; Civil 8a must be taken with 8b during
the First Term.
References: Ketchum, Walls, Bins and Grain Elevators;
Howe, Retaining Walls for Earth; Cain, Earth Pressure, Walls
and Bins; Morley, Theory of Structures.
One lecture per week each term. Mr. Matheson.
9. Structural Design 1.—Problems in draughting, illustrat-,
ing designs in structural engineering; estimates of quantities
and costs; preparation of plans.
Text-book: Conklin, Structural Draughting and Elementary
Design, Wiley; Carnegie, Pocket Companion, Carnegie Steel Co.
Prerequisite: First Term of Civil 10.
One lecture and one three-hour period.  Second Term.
Mr. Matheson.
10. Strength of Materials.—A thorough introduction to the
fundamental principles dealing with the strength of materials;
stress, deformation, elasticity and resilience; the application of
the laws of derived curves to the construction of load, shear,
moment, inclination and deflection diagrams, fibre stress, deflection of simple, cantilever, and continuous beams under any
loading; riveted joints; torsion; columns; combined stresses;
longitudinal shear; reinforced concrete; special beams.
The laboratory period includes the testing of cement, concrete, timber1 and steel specimens to determine the strength and
elasticity of these materials.
About one-half of the laboratory time will be set aside for
the solution of problems in investigation and design.
Text-book: Maurer and Withey, Strength of Materials,
Wiley.
Reference: Swain, Strength of Materials; Morley, Strength
of Materials. Civil, Engineering 219
Prerequisites: Physics 6, Civil 4 and 31.
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Duckering, Mr. Lighthall.
Note:—The laboratory testing is performed in the Forest
Products Laboratories, under the supervision of Superintendent
Brown and Mr. Lighthall.
11. Transportation 1. Railways.—The inception of railway
projects; reconnaissance, preliminary and location; grade problems; grades, curvature and distance and their effects upon
operating costs and revenue; velocity and pusher grades;
adjustment of grades for unbalanced traffic; construction; railway economics, traffic, revenue, branch lines. *
Prerequisite: Civil 6 and 7.
Text-book: Williams, Design of Railway Location, Wiley.
Reference: Allen, Railroads, Curves and Earthwork,
McGraw-Hill; Wellington, Economic Theory of the Location of
Railways, Wiley. y
Two lectures per week.  Mr. Wilkin.
12. Hydraulic Engineering 1.—(a) Hydrostatics; design of
standpipes, reservoirs and dams.
(6) Hydrodynamics; fundamental principles and their
application to problems on the discharge of orifices, notches and
weirs; flow in pipes and open channels; practical field and
laboratory measurements; examination of hydraulic developments.
Prerequisite: Physics 6.
Text-book: Schoder and Dawson, Hydraulics, McGraw Hill.
One lecture and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall.
13. Mapping 2. — Draughting from notes obtained in
Civil 7; railway location and hydrographie surveys; topographic
maps from photographic plates.
One three-hour period per week.   Mr. Oliver.
14. Surveying 2.—A continuation of Civil 6. (a) Theory
and use  of aneroid,  sextant,  plane-table  and precise  instru- 220 Faculty op Applied Science
ments; plane-table surveying; mine, hydrographie and photo-
topographic surveying; Dominion and Provincial surveys. First
Term.
(6) Field Astronomy.   Second Term.
Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Surveying, Vol. II, Wiley.
References: Johnson and Smith, Theory and Practice of
Surveying, Wiley; Wilson, Topographic, Trigonometric and
Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Green's Practical and Spherical
Astronomy, Ginn and Co.; Manual of Surveys of Dominion
Lands; Instructions for B. C. Land Surveyors.
Prerequisite: Civil 6.
Two lectures per week.  Mr. Lighthall.
15. Perspective Drawing and Map Projections.—(a) Mathematical perspective; perspective drawings of buildings and
structures.  First Term.
(b) Map Projections.   Second Term.
Prerequisite: Civil 1. i
Text-book:   Crosskey,   Elementary   Perspective,   Blackie   &
Son; Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, Second Edition, Wiley.
One two-hour period per week.  Mr. Lighthall.
16. Field Work 3.—Problems in geodetic and precise surveying; determination of latitude, azimuth and time by
solar and stellar observations; baseline measurements; precise
levelling.
Prerequisite: Civil 7.
Time, same as for Civil 2.   Mr. Lighthall.
17. Structural Design 2.—Selection of types of' bridges;
determination of loadings; stresses; choice of cross-sectional
forms and areas; design of combination wood and steel trusses,
steel trusses; design of connections; masonry structures, dams
and retaining walls; complete drawings.
Text-book: Kuntz, Design of Steel Bridges, McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern Framed
Structures, Vol. Ill, Wiley; Kirkham, Structural Engineering,
McGraw-Hill; Carnegie, Pocket Companion. Civil Engineering 221
Prerequisites: Civil 8, 9 and 10.
One lecture and two three-hour periods per week.
Mr. Matheson.
18. Engineering Economics.—(a) A general treatment of;
sinking funds; first cost; cost analysis; salvage and scrap values;
yearly cost of service; collecting data; estimating; economic
selection, reports.
Text-book: Forsyth, Tables reprinted from introduction to
Mathematical Theory of Finance, John Wiley and Sons.
Prerequisites; Economics 1.
Two lectures per week. First Term. Mr. Wilkin.
(b) Principles of financing; forms of business enterprises;
stocks; bonds; operating and fixed charges; business finance;
capital and interpretation of financial statements.
References: Fish, Engineering Economics, Second Edition.
Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law. Lough, Business
Finance.
Two lectures per week.  Second Term.  Mr. Wilkin.
19. Engineering Law.—-The engineer's status; fees; salary;
as a witness; responsibility; engineering contracts; tenders;
specifications; plans; extras and alterations; time; payments and
certificates; penalty, bonus or liquidated damages; maintenance
and defects; subcontractors; agents; arbitration and awards;
specification and contract writing.
Text-book: Kirby, Elements of Specification Writing, Wiley
& Sons.
References: Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law of
Canada, W. H. Anger; Ball, Law Affecting Engineers, Constable
and Co.
One lecture per week. Mr. Matheson.
20. Surveying 3.—Geodesy; the determination of azimuth,
longitude, latitude, time, the figure of the earth; measurement of
baselines; triangulation systems; adjustments and reductions of
observations; precise levelling. 222 Faculty op Applied Science
References: Hosmer, Geodesy, Wiley; Cary, Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Gillespie, Higher Surveying, D. Appleton and Co.
Prerequisite: Civil 14.
One lecture per week. Mr. Lighthall.
21. Hydraulic Engineering 2.—Waterpower engineering;
rainfall, runoff, stream flow; investigation of power problems;
selection of hydraulic machines; hydrographs; auxiliary power;
mass curves, load factors and characteristics; impulse and
reaction wheels; methods of control and operation of various
forms of machines; transmission of hydraulic power.
Text-books: Mead, Water-power Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
References: Gibson, Hydroelectric Engineering, Volume I,
Blackie; Mead, Hydrology, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Civil 12 must either precede or be taken concurrently.
One lecture per week, and fifteen hours in laboratory.
Second Term. Mr. Wilkin.
22. Municipal Engineering.—(a) Sewerage and Sewage
Disposal. General methods and economic consideration; quantity
and run-off; design of sewers, manholes, flush tanks, etc.; construction methods, materials and costs; estimate, design, maintenance and management.
Sewage Disposal: Physical, chemical, biological and economical aspects of sewage treatment; dilution; screening, sedimentation, filtration; disinfection; maintenance and management
costs.   First Term.
References: Metcalf and Eddy, Sewerage and Sewage Disposal, McGraw-Hill; Fuller and McClintock, Sewage Problems,
McGraw-Hill.
(6) Water Supply, Rainfall; evaporation; run-off; quantity, quality and pressure required; pumping machinery;
storage; aqueducts, pipe lines and distribution systems; purification systems; valves, hydrants and fire service; materials,
estimates and designs; construction methods and costs. Second
Term. Civil Engineering 223
References: Turneaure, Public Water Supply, 3rd Edition,
Wiley; Flinn, Westbrook, Bogart, Waterworks Handbook,
McGraw-Hill.
(c) Town Planning; covering the economical and artistic
development of a city, city management. Street cleaning and
disposal of waste; composition and quantity of city wastes;
collection, dumping and disposal; land treatment; incineration
and reduction; costs and returns. Second Term.
Reference: Lewis, City Planning, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Civil 12.
Two lectures and one two-hour period per week. Mr. Stuart.
23. Transportation 2.—(a) Railways. Organization and
rules of maintenance-of-way; roadway; ballast; ties; lumber
preservation; rails and appurtenances; turnouts, tracks, accessories ; structures and their design; stresses in track; track tools;
track work; work-train service; maintenance-of-way records and
accounts; expenditures; betterments; improvements of old lines,
yards and terminals; maximum capacity of single track.
Prerequisite: Civil 11.
Two lectures per week, First Term.   Mr. Oliver.
(b) Highways. Highway economies, surveys and locations;
grades; cross-sections; paving materials; construction methods;
designs and estimates.
Streets and pavements; materials, design, construction,
maintenance and repairs.
Text-book: Agg, Construction of Roads and Pavements,
McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Harger and Bonney, Highway Engineer's Handbook.
Prerequisite: Civil 11.
Two lectures per week, Second Term.   Mr. Oliver.
24. Mechanics of Materials.—A continuation of Civil 10,
Strength of Materials; the application of the Principle of Least
Work to the determination of statically indeterminate forces in
beams and rigid frames; stress and deflection of unsymmetrical 224 Faculty op Applied Science
sections and beams with variable moment of inertia; analysis
and design of reinforced concrete beams, slabs, columns, and
reinforced concrete arches.
Text-book: Hool and Kinne, Concrete Engineer's Handbook, McGraw-Hill.
References: Ketchum, Steel Mill Buildings; Hool, Reinforced Concrete, Vol. Ill; Urquhart and O'Rourke, Design
of Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Civil 10.
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Duckering.
25. Theory of Structures.—The analysis of statically determinate framed structures under dead and live loads; distortion
of framed structures; the use of influence lines for analysis of
stresses and deflections; hinged and hingeless arches; secondary
stresses and redundant members.
Text-book: Kuntz, Design of Steel Bridges, McGraw-Hill.
References: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern Framed
Structures, Vols. I and II, Wiley; Hool and Kinne, Framed
Structures, McGraw-Hill; Morley, Theory of Structures, Longmans Green and Co.
Prerequisite: Civil 10.
One lecture and two three-hour periods per week.
Mr. Finlay.
26. Class Excursions.—Members of the Fifth Year class in
Civil Engineering, under the supervision of an instructor, will
visit such factories, industrial developments, public works, docks,
shipyards, and important examples of engineering construction
as are calculated to assist the student best to grasp the application and scope of the studies pursued and to broaden his vision
of the engineering field.   Written reports of trips are required.
Note:—In periods where no trips are taken, tests of
hydraulic machines will be made in Hydraulic Laboratory. (See
Civil 29.)
27. Civil Engineering Thesis.—Original research on selected Civil Engineering 225
topics; analyses of engineering projects; experimental or theoretical investigations. Topics may be selected from divisions of
the Civil Engineering Course: Geodetics, Railways, Hydraulics,
Municipal, Highways, Economic and Business Engineering,
Structures. Copy of thesis in regular form and binder must be
filed with the department.
28. Seminar. ■— Written and oral discussion of articles
appearing in the current Transactions and Proceedings of the
various engineering societies, also reviews of important papers
in engineering periodicals; reports on local engineering projects
visited in Civil 26; written outlines must be prepared for all
oral reports; training in technical writing and public speaking.
Required of all Fourth and Fifth Year students in Civil
Engineering.
Reference: Rickard, Technical Writing, McGraw-Hill.
One hour per week.
29. Hydraulic Engineering 3. — Theory, investigation and
design of hydraulic motors and machinery. Turbines, Pelton
and impulse wheels, centrifugal pumps, hydro-electric installations, plant design and operation.
Laboratory work, testing hydraulic machines, arranged for
periods when no trips are taken.   (See Civil 26.)
Prerequisite: Civil 12.
Text-book: Dougherty, Hydraulic Turbines, Third Edition,
McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Gibson, Hydro-electric Engineering, Volume I;
Gibson, Hydraulics and Its Application, Van Nostrand; Mead,
Water Power Engineering, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin.
30. Engineering Problems 1. — Training in methods of
attacking, analyzing and solving engineering problems. Coaching in proper methods of work and study, including drill in
systematic arrangement and workmanship in calculations. The
content is based upon the application of mathematics to problems in physics and engineering.
Prerequisite: First Year Arts, or Senior Matriculation. 226 Faculty op Applied Science
Text-books: Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second Edition,
McGraw-Hill; Swain, How to Study, McGraw-Hill.
Two two-hour periods per week.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Oliver.
31. Engineering Problems 2.—A continuation of Engineering Problems 1, involving a thorough drill in problems in the
principal divisions of Mathematics given in the Second and
Third Years of Applied Science, drawn from the field of
mechanics, surveying, draughting, and engineering.
Prerequisite: Civil 30, Math. 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Text-book: Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second Edition,
McGraw-Hill.
One three-hour period per week.
Mr. Duckering, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Wilkin.
50. Elementary problems in rural engineering, dealing with
drainage, water supply, sewerage and sewage disposal, ventilation, simple structures and surveying. Adapted to the needs of
students in Dairying.
One lecture per week. Mr. Stuart.
Department of Economics
Professor: Theodore  H.   Boggs.
Professor: H.  F.  Angus.
Associate Professor: J.  Friend Day.
Associate Professor: Coral Wesley Topping.
Assistant Professor: G. F. Drummond.
1. Principles of Economics.— An introductory study of
general economic theory, including a survey of the principles
of value, prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs,
monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of
railways and trusts, etc.
Text-books: Rufener, Principles of Economics, Houghton
Mifflin.   The Canada Year Book, 1929.
Two lectures per week. Forestry 227
Department Of Forestry
Professor: H. R. Christie.
Assistant Professor: F. Malcolm Knapp.
Honorary Lecturer: R. M. Brown.
1. General Forestry.—A general survey of the subject.
Text-book: Fernow, Economics of Forestry, Toronto University Press.
References: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British
Columbia, Commission of Conservation, Ottawa. Pinchot, Primer
of Forestry, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C.
Moon and Brown, Elements of Forestry, Wiley, second edition.
Allen, Practical Forestry in the Pacific Northwest, Western
Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland. Schlich, Forest
Policy in the British Empire, fourth edition, Bradbury Agnew.
Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the World, McGraw-
Hill. Various government publications.
One lecture per week.
2. Forest Mensuration.—Measurement of felled timber, of
standing timber, and of growth of trees and forests. Includes
scaling, timber estimating, and preparation of tables of volume,
growth and yield.
Text-book: Chapman, Forest Mensuration, Wiley, second
edition. Winkenwerder and Clark, Problems in Forest Mensuration, second edition, Wiley.
Reference books: Graves, Woodsman's Handbook, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Graves, Forest Mensuration, Wiley. Carey, Manual for Northern Woodsmen, third
edition, Harvard Press.
One lecture and one period of four hours' field or laboratory
work per week.   One week field work after April examinations.
3. Forest Protection.—The fire problem, legislation, organizations, prevention and control.
Text-book: Western Fire Fighters' Manual, Western Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland.
Reference    books:    Millar,    Methods    of    Communication 228 Faculty op Applied Science
Adapted   to   Forest   Protection,   Dominion   Forestry   Branch,
Ottawa.   U. S. Forest Service, Trail Building in the National
Forests, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C.
One lecture per week. Second Term.
4. Forest Finance.—Forestry from the financial standpoint,
including studies of compound interest, valuation, rotation,
insurance and taxation.
Text-book: Roth, Forest Valuation, University of Michigan,
Second Edition.
Reference books: Chapman, Forest Finance, Wiley. Woodward, Valuation of American Timber Lands, Wiley.
Two periods of one hour each, lectures and problems, per
week.   Second Term.
5. Timber Physics and Wood Technology.—The structure of
wood; the identification of different woods and their qualities
and uses; wood seasoning; wood preservation; emphasis on the
Canadian woods of commercial importance.
Text-books: Record, Economic Woods of the United States,
Wiley, second edition. Record, Mechanical Properties of Wood,
Wiley.
Reference books: Koehler, The Properties and Uses of
Wood, McGraw-Hill. Koehler and Thelen, Kiln Drying of Lumber, McGraw-Hill. Snow, Wood and Other Organic Structural-
Materials, McGraw-Hill. Roth, Timber, U. S. Forest Service,
Bui. 10, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
6. Forest Organization.—The principles and methods of
organizing forest areas for business management. Normal forest,
increment, rotation, felling budget, working plans.
Text-book: Roth, Forest Regulation, Roth, University of
Michigan.
Reference books: Recknagel and Bentley, Forest Management, Wiley. Recknagel, Forest Working Plans, Wiley, second
edition. Schlich, Forest Management, Bradbury Agnew. Woolsey, American Forest Regulation, Woolsey, New Haven.
One lecture per week. Forestry 229
7. History of Forestry and Forest Administration.—The
development of forestry in different parts of the world; forest
resources and industries, policy, legislation and education.
Reference books: Fernow, History of Forestry, University
of Toronto Press, second edition. Schlich, Forest Policy in
the British Empire, Bradbury Agnew. Boerker, Our National
Forests, Macmillan. Ise, The United States Forest Policy, Yale
University Press. Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the
World, McGraw-Hill.   Various government publications.
One lecture per week.
8. Silviculture.—Principles and methods of caring for
forests and growing timber crops.
Text-books: Hawley, Practice of Silviculture, Wiley, 2nd
edition. Tourney, Planting and Seeding in the Practice of
Forestry, Wiley.
Reference books: Graves, Principles of Handling Woodlands, Wiley. Woolsey, Studies in French Forestry, Wiley.
Schlich, Silviculture, Bradbury Agnew. Various government
publications.
Two lectures per week during the year, and one period of
three hours field or laboratory work during the second term.
9. General Lumbering.—A general study of the principles
and practice of logging and milling in the chief timber regions
of North America.
Text-book: Bryant, Logging, Wiley, second edition.
Reference books: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir
Region, U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D. C. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and Yellow
Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent
of Documents, Washington, D. C.
Two lectures per week, First Term.
One lecture per week, Second Term.
10. Logging.—An intensive study of logging systems and
operations in the forests of western North America.
Text-book: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir Region,
U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. 230 Faculty op Applied Science
Reference books: Various articles in the Timberman,
B. C. Lumberman and other trade journals.
One lecture per week throughout the year; one period of
four hours laboratory or field work per week, alternating with
Forestry 11 and 12.
11. Milling.—A study of the sawmilling and allied woodworking industries of western North America.
Text-book: Bryant, Lumber, Wiley.
Reference books: Oakleaf, Lumber Manufacture in the
Douglas Fir Region, Commercial Journal Co. Brown, American
Lumber Industry, Wiley. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and
Yellow Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Seeley, Small Sawmills, U. S. D. A. Bui. 718, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D. C.
Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory
or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10. First
Term.
12. Forest Products.—A study of other forest industries,
including paper and pulp, naval stores, and wood distillation.
Text-book: Brown, Forest Products, Their Manufacture and
Use, Wiley.   Second edition.
Reference books: Joint Authorship, The Manufacture of
Pulp and Paper, Vols. Ill to V, McGraw-Hill. Hawley, Wood
Distillation, Chemical Catalogue Co.
Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory
or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10. Second
Term.
Vancouver Laboratory
Forest Products Laboratories of Canada
R. M. Brown, B.ScF. (Toronto), Superintendent.
R. S.  Perry, B.Sc.   (McGill), Assistant Engineer. Forest Products Laboratories 231
Division of Timber Mechanics
J. B. Alexander, B.Sc.  (New Brunswick), D.L.S., A.L.S., Timber  Tests
Supervisor.
J. T. Lee, Timber Tester.
D. S. Wright, Timber Tester.
W. J. Phillips, B.A.Sc.   (Brit. Col.), Timber Tester.
W. W. Davidson, Assistant Timber Tester.
R. J.  Eades, Assistant  Timber Tester.
C. R. Murray, B.A.  (Dalhousie), Laboratory Assistant.
Division of Timber Physics
J. H. Jenkins, B.A.Sc.   (Brit. Col.), Timber Products  Supervisor.
H.  W.  Eades,  B.ScF.   (Washington),  Assistant  Timber  Pathologist.
F.  W. Guernsey, B.A.Sc.   (Brit. Col.), Assistant in Timber Products.
D. J.  Bartlett, Forest Products Assistant.
The Forest Service of the Federal Department of the
Interior maintains two Forest Products Laboratories, one at
Ottawa, and the other at Vancouver, in association with the
University of British Columbia. The latter was established in
1918 in order to more adequately deal with forest products
research problems of the western portion of Canada. It was
equipped at first only for timber testing, as British Columbia
timbers are of outstanding importance for structural purposes.
The scope of the work of the laboratory has gradually extended
in accordance with the requirements of the timber industry and
now includes lumber seasoning investigations, timber decay
research, mill studies, etc. During the winter a six-day kiln
course is put on for the benefit of kiln operators and other selected applicants from the lumber industry. A most important
phase of the work of the laboratory is its technical service to
the timber industries in the dissemination of information on a
variety of subjects, such as wood preservation, utilization of
wood waste, pulp and paper, wood distillation, etc. Research
in wood preservation is, at present, confined to the Ottawa Laboratory. A co-operative laboratory has been established at
McGill University through an arrangement with the Canadian
Pulp & Paper Association, McGill University and the Forest
Products Laboratories of Canada, which deals with all questions relating to pulp and paper research. 232 Faculty of Applied Science
An increasingly valuable amount of material has been
collected from the research work of other laboratories and
catalogued for reference.
A mutually beneficial scheme of co-operation exists between
the Laboratory and the University, whereby students of the
University in Engineering and Forestry have access to the
laboratory to watch the work being carried on and to use the
apparatus at times in testing strength of materials. The staff
of the Laboratory also has the benefit of the University library
and the advice and assistance of University specialists in related
work.
Department of Geology  and  Geography
Professor: R. W. Brock.
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams.
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology: T. C Phemister.
Lecturer: Martin A. Peacock.
Assistant: Norman  Freshwater.
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction
to the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in
the lectures and laboratory:
(a) Physical Geology, including weathering, work of the
wind, ground water, streams, glaciers, the ocean and its work,
the structures of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous
intrusions, metamorphism, mountains and plateaus, and ore-
deposits.
Two lectures per week, First Term.   Mr. Schofield.
(b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, including
the study and identification of the most common minerals and
rocks, the interpretation of topographical and geological maps,
and the study of structures by the use of models.
Two hours laboratory per week.  First Term.  Mr. Schofield.
(c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and Quaternary eras. Geology 233
Two lectures per week, Second Term.   Mr. Williams.
(d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, consisting
of the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations, their evolution and migration as illustrated by their
occurrence in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography
will be taken up and illustrated by the study of the palaeogeography of North America.
Two hours laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr.
Williams.
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will
take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the
lectures.
Prerequisite; Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or Chemistry 1 or Physics 1 or 2 taken either before or concurrently.
Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Introductory Geology,
Wiley.
Reference books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill,
Rocks, Rock-Weathering and Soils. Coleman and Parks, Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study of Fossils.
Davis, Geographical Essays.  Hugh Miller's works.
Students will be required to make a passing mark in each
of the above subdivisions. 3 units.
2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of
mineralogy.
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive
Mineralogy of 40 of the more common mineral species, with
special reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common
crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a
brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative
Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-books: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by
Ford, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. 234 Faculty op Applied Science
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week.  First Term.  Mr. Phemister.
2. (6) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy.—This
course supplements 2 (a) and consists of a more complete survey
of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a
critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special
emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association
and alteration.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 2 (a).
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week.   Second Term.   Mr. Phemister.
3. Historical Geology. — Continental evolution and development of life, with special reference to North America.
Text-book: Schuchert, Historical Geology, 2nd Ed., Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Williams.
4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following
subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage,
structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major
units of structures, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special reference to the physiography
of British Columbia.
Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, Holt.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures per week.   Second Term.  Mr. Schofield.
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study
of the earth and the development of the geological sciences.
Mr. Brock.
(b) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology
and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield,
Mr. Brock.
(c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the
continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their
influences upon life. Mr. Brock.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures and one hour laboratory per week. Geology 235
6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate
fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both
geological and geographical.
Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American Index
Fossils.  Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. Mr. Williams.
7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of
(i) optical mineralogy, and (ii) petrography, with an introduction to petrogenesis.
The laboratory work deals with the determination of rocks,
first under the microscope and then in hand specimens.
Text-books: Harker, Petrology for Students, Cambridge University Press. Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopical Determination of Rock forming Minerals and Rocks, University of
Chicago Press. Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by
Ford, Wiley.
Reference works: Johannsen, Manual of Petrographic
Methods. Rosenbusch, Microscopical Physiography of the Rock-
making Minerals, translated by Iddings. Rosenbusch, Elemente
der Gesteinslehre. Grubenmann, Die Kristallinen Schiefer.
Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods of two hours per
week. Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis,
and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral
deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore
deposits of the British Empire, special stress being placed on
those in Canada.
Text-book: Ries, Economic Geology, 6th Edition, Wiley.
Reference books: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits, 3rd ed.;
Emmons, General Economic Geology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course.
Four hours per week.
Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister.
9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course dealing 236 Faculty op Applied Science
with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means
of the reflecting microscope.
The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding and
polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in micro-
chemical methods of mineral determination.
During the second term each student is assigned a suite of
ores from some mining district for a critical examination and
report.
Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination
of the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany
this course.
One laboratory period of two hours per week. Mr. Phemister.
10. Field Geology. — The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers
of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially
practical, and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field. The students
construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of
Vancouver which require the use of the various methods and
instruments employed in field geology.
Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook
for Field Geologists.  Spurr, Geology Applied to